2011 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Performance and
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-36
Universal Remote System . . . . 5-42
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-16
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-25
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-29
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-47
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
iii
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or
due to changes subsequent to the
printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase
documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of
the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name "General
Motors of Canada Limited" for
Chevrolet Motor Division wherever
it appears in this manual.
Canadian Vehicle Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer or from:
The names, logos, emblems,
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante:
slogans, vehicle model names, and
vehicle body designs appearing in
this manual including, but not limited
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,
the CHEVROLET Emblem,
IMPALA, and the IMPALA Emblem
are trademarks and/or service
marks of General Motors LLC, its
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
française
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 20782813 A First Printing
© 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
Introduction
Using this Manual
Symbols
WARNING
{
To quickly locate information about
the vehicle, use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
Notice: This means there is
something that could result in
property or vehicle damage. This
would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty.
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
A circle with a slash through it
is a safety symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or
“Do not let this happen.”
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury
or death.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
v
Vehicle Symbol Chart
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to
the Index.
j : LATCH System Child
Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
Introduction
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-1
Sensing System for
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-18
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-19
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-19
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Roadside Assistance
In Brief
Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 1-9
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-11
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless
Vehicle Features
Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-7
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-15
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2
In Brief
Instrument Panel
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑5.
J. Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑6.
R. Ignition Positions on page 9‑16.
B. Remote Trunk Release Button.
S. Climate Control Systems on
page 8‑1.
See Trunk on page 2‑10.
K. Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑29 (If Equipped).
C. Turn and Lane-Change Signals
on page 6‑5.
T. Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
L. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5‑2.
U. Center Console Shift Lever
(If Equipped). See Shifting Into
Park on page 9‑20.
D. Instrument Cluster on
page 5‑11.
M. Cruise Control on page 9‑32.
E. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6‑4.
N. Hood Release. See Hood on
page 10‑5.
V. Glove Box on page 4‑1.
F. Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑24.
O. Data Link Connector. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑17.
G. Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑16.
P. Horn on page 5‑3.
H. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑6.
Q. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑3 (If Equipped).
I. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-4
In Brief
Press and hold V for
approximately one second to
open the trunk.
Initial Drive
Information
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the
important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle.
Press L and release to locate
the vehicle.
Press L and hold for more
than two seconds to sound the
panic alarm.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual.
Press L again to cancel the
panic alarm.
Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System
The RKE transmitter is used to
remotely lock and unlock the doors
from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from
the vehicle.
Press K to unlock the driver door.
Press again within five seconds to
unlock all remaining doors.
See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
Press Q to lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can
be personalized. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑36 for
additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-5
Canceling a Remote Start
Power Door Locks
Power door lock switches are
located on the front doors near the
handle.
Remote Vehicle Start
With this feature the engine can be
started from outside of the vehicle.
To cancel a remote start:
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off.
Starting the Vehicle
Q : Press the bottom of the switch
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
to lock all doors.
.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
K : Press the top of the switch to
unlock all doors.
2. Press Q.
Turn the ignition on and then
back off.
For more information, see:
3. Immediately after completing
.
Step 2, press and hold / until
the turn signal lamps flash.
Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑5.
.
Delayed Locking on page 2‑8.
When the vehicle starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
Door Locks
Trunk Release
In addition to the trunk release
Manual Locks
button on the RKE transmitter, there
From outside the vehicle, use the
key in the door or the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to
lock or unlock the vehicle. From the
inside, pull up or push down on the
manual door lock knobs.
is a remote release V button
located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended only once.
For more information, see Trunk on
page 2‑10.
See Door Locks on page 2‑6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-6
In Brief
Use the lever on the outboard side
of the seat to raise or recline the
seatback. See “Manual Reclining
Seatbacks” under Reclining
Seatbacks on page 3‑5.
Windows
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seats
Power Seats
The power window switches are
on the driver door armrest. Each
passenger door has a switch that
controls only that window.
To adjust a manual seat:
1. Lift the bar under the front edge
of the seat cushion to unlock
the seat.
Press the front of the switch to the
first position to open the window.
Pull the switch up to close it.
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
.
Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
For more information, see Power
Windows on page 2‑17.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
.
Raise or lower the front or rear
of the seat cushion by moving
the front or rear of the control up
or down.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-7
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4.
The vehicle also has an under seat
storage area.
Manual Lumbar
See Rear Seats (Split Folding) on
page 3‑8 for more information.
Power Reclining Seatback
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the head
restraint height in the proper
position.
Increase or decrease the lumbar
support by repeatedly pushing down
or pulling up on the lever.
To adjust a power seatback,
if equipped:
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑4 for more information.
For more information see Head
Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3.
.
Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
Second Row Seats
.
Tilt the top of the control forward
On vehicles with the flip and fold
feature, the bottom seat cushions
can be flipped forward and the
seatback folded down to create an
extended cargo area.
to raise.
See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”
under Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-8
In Brief
Safety Belt
Sensing System for
Passenger Airbag
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags,
seat‐side impact airbags, and
roof‐rail airbags are not affected
by this.
United States
The passenger airbag status
indicator will be visible on the
instrument panel when the vehicle
is started.
Canada
Refer to the following sections for
important information on how to use
safety belts properly.
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑34 for important information.
.
Safety Belts on page 3‑10.
.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly on page 3‑13.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑19.
.
Lap Belt on page 3‑24.
.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑50.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-9
Interior Mirror
Mirror Adjustment
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
Vehicles with a manual rearview
mirror can be adjusted by holding
the mirror in the center to move it for
a clearer view behind the vehicle.
Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from
the headlamps behind. Pull the
lever, located at the bottom of the
mirror for nighttime use. Return the
lever to its original position for the
day position.
Exterior Mirrors
See Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 2‑15.
On vehicles with an automatic
dimming rearview mirror, the mirror
will automatically adjust to reduce
the glare of lights from behind the
vehicle. See Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror on page 2‑16.
The tilt wheel lever is located on the
left side of the steering column.
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are on the driver door
armrest.
To adjust the steering wheel:
Press the left or right side of
the selector located above the
control pad to adjust the driver or
passenger mirror. Then press the
control pad to move the mirror in
the desired direction.
1. Hold the wheel and pull the
lever toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
3. Release the lever to lock the
steering wheel in place.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑15.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-10
In Brief
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Map Lamps
Exterior Lighting
The vehicle has map lamps on the
rearview mirror. Push the button
near each lamp to turn the map
lamps on and off.
Interior Lighting
Dome Lamp
For more information on interior
lighting, see:
The center mounted dome lamp
overhead comes on when a door is
opened. This lamp can also be
turned on by turning the instrument
panel brightness control clockwise.
.
Exterior Lighting on page 1‑10.
.
Courtesy Lamps on page 6‑6.
.
Delayed Entry Lighting on
Reading Lamps
page 6‑7.
The vehicle has reading lamps that
also act as the dome lamp. Press
the button near each lamp to turn
them on and off.
.
Delayed Exit Lighting on
page 6‑7.
The exterior lamps control is located
on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering wheel.
.
Parade Dimming on page 6‑7.
P : Briefly turn to this position to
manually turn the automatic lamp
control and Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) off or on. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, the off position
only works when the vehicle is
shifted into the P (Park) position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-11
AUTO: Automatically operates the
headlamps and other exterior lamps
at normal brightness.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
9 : Turns the windshield
wipers off.
6 : Turn the band up for more
frequent wipes or down for less
frequent wipes.
; : Turns on the parking lamps
and taillamps.
2 : Turns on the headlamps and
6 : Slow wipes.
? : Fast wipes.
other exterior lamps.
# : (If Equipped) Turns on the
fog lamps.
Windshield Washer
For more information, see:
Push the paddle L at the top of the
lever to spray washer fluid on the
windshield.
.
Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑2.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑4.
.
Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.
The lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System on
page 6‑4.
8 : Single wipe, turn to 8, then
release. Several wipes, hold the
band on 8 longer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-12
In Brief
Climate Controls
This vehicle may have a dual or single climate control system.
The heating, cooling, defrost, defog, and ventilation can be controlled
with either of these systems.
Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls
A. Fan Control
F. Driver and Passenger Heated
Seats
B. Outside Air
G. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
C. Recirculation
D. Air Delivery Mode Control
E. Air Conditioning
H. Rear Window Defogger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-13
Single Zone
E. Air Delivery Mode Control
A. Fan Control
B. Outside Air
F. Air Conditioning
C. Temperature Control
D. Recirculation
G. Rear Window Defogger
See Climate Control Systems on
page 8‑1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-14
In Brief
MP3, or WMA song. If information
is available during XM, CD, MP3,
or WMA playback, the song title
information displays on the top line
of the display and artist information
displays on the bottom line.
Vehicle Features
Radio(s)
When information is not available,
“No Info” displays.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Introduction on page 7‑1.
Storing a Favorite Station
Depending on which radio the
vehicle has, radio stations are
stored as either favorites or presets.
For radios with a FAV button, a
maximum of 36 stations can be
stored as favorites using the
6 softkeys located below the radio
station frequency tabs and by using
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to
go through up to 6 pages of
favorites, each having 6 favorite
stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain
any combination of AM, FM, or XM
stations.
Radio with CD (MP3)
O : Press to turn the system on
and off. Turn to increase or
decrease the volume.
f : Select radio stations.
© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.
4 : Press to display additional text
information related to the current
FM-RDS or XM station; or CD,
BAND: Press to choose between
FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-15
For radios without a FAV button, up
to 18 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2, and
6 AM), can be programmed on the
6 numbered buttons.
iPod®, MP3 players, etc. can be
connected to the auxiliary input jack
using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack
cable.
Satellite Radio
XM is a satellite radio service
that is based in the 48 contiguous
United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM satellite radio has a
wide variety of programming and
commercial-free music, coast to
coast, and in digital-quality sound.
See Operation on page 7‑2.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack”
under Auxiliary Devices on
page 7‑19.
Setting the Clock
To set the time and date for the
Radio with CD (MP3):
Bluetooth®
A fee is required to receive the
XM service.
1. Turn the radio on.
For vehicles with a Bluetooth
system, it allows users with a
Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone to
make and receive hands-free calls
using the vehicle’s audio system
and controls.
2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,
DD, and YYYY (hour, minute,
month, day, and year) display.
For more information, refer to:
.
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
3. Press the pushbutton located
below any one of the tabs that
you want to change.
.
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
must be paired with the Bluetooth
system before it can be used in the
vehicle. Not all phones will support
all functions. For more information,
visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
See “XM Satellite Radio Service”
under Satellite Radio on page 7‑8.
4. Increase or decrease the time or
date by turning f clockwise or
counterclockwise.
Portable Audio Devices
This vehicle may have an auxiliary
input jack, located on the audio
faceplate. External devices such as
For detailed instructions on setting
the clock for your specific audio
system, see Clock on page 5‑7.
For more information, see Bluetooth
on page 7‑20.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-16
In Brief
Steering Wheel Controls
b g : Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again to turn
the sound on. Press and hold longer
than two seconds to interact with
the OnStar® or Bluetooth systems,
if equipped.
Cruise Control
c x : Press to go to the
previous radio station stored as a
favorite, the next track if a CD is
playing, to reject an incoming call,
or end a current call.
SRCE : Press to choose between
the radio, CD, and auxiliary
input jack.
If equipped, these controls are
located on the right side of the
steering wheel.
The cruise control buttons are
located on the left side of the
steering wheel.
+ e − e : Increases or decreases
volume.
w : Press to go to the next radio
station stored as a favorite, or the
next track if a CD is playing.
J : Press to turn cruise control on
and off. The indicator is lit when
cruise control is on.
¨ : Press to go to the next radio
station while in AM, FM, or XM™.
Press to go to the next track or
chapter while sourced to the CD.
+RES: Press briefly to make the
vehicle resume to a previously set
speed, or press and hold to
accelerate.
For more information, see Steering
Wheel Controls on page 5‑3.
SET−: Press to set the speed and
activate cruise control or make the
vehicle decelerate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-17
.
For vehicles with traction control
and electronic stability control,
[ : Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Performance and
Maintenance
press and release 5 on the
instrument panel to turn off
For more information, see Cruise
Control on page 9‑32.
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The vehicle may have a traction
control system which limits wheel
spin. The system turns on
automatically every time the vehicle
is started.
traction control. F illuminates
and the appropriate DIC
message displays. See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5‑32.
Power Outlets
The vehicle has three 12‐volt outlets
which can be used to plug in
electrical equipment, such as a cell
phone or MP3 player.
.
Press and release the button
again to turn on traction control.
.
For more information, see Traction
Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑29.
For vehicles with traction control,
On vehicles with a center console,
one outlet is located inside the
center floor console and two outlets
are located at the front of the
console bin under the instrument
panel.
press and release i on the
instrument panel to turn off
traction control. F illuminates
and the appropriate DIC
message displays. See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5‑32.
On vehicles without a center
console, two are located under the
climate controls and another outlet
for the rear seat passengers is at
the rear of the center front seat.
Remove the cover to access and
replace when not in use.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-18
In Brief
During cooler conditions, the low tire
pressure warning light may appear
when the vehicle is first started and
then turn off. This may be an early
indicator that the tire pressures are
getting low and the tires need to be
inflated to the proper pressure.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control
system assists with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions. The system turns
on automatically every time the
vehicle is started.
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS does not replace normal
monthly tire maintenance. It is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
.
To turn off both traction control
and Electronic Stability Control,
The TPMS warning light alerts you
to a significant loss in pressure of
one of the vehicle's tires. If the
warning light comes on, stop as
soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12. The warning
light will remain on until the tire
pressure is corrected.
press and hold 5 on the
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10‑46.
instrument panel until F
illuminates and the appropriate
DIC message displays. See
Ride Control System Messages
on page 5‑32.
.
Press and release the button
again to turn on both systems.
For more information, see Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) on
page 9‑31.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-19
.
.
Combine several trips into a
single trip.
use only the unleaded gasoline
described under Recommended
Fuel on page 9‑35.
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle use
and displays a DIC message when
it is necessary to change the engine
oil and filter. The oil life system
should be reset to 100% only
Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips
to get the best fuel economy
possible.
.
Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
following an oil change.
Resetting the Oil Life System
Roadside Assistance
Program
1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
on the DIC.
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly.
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET
button on the DIC for more than
five seconds. The oil life will
change to 100%.
.
Brake gradually and avoid
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
abrupt stops.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long
As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
you are automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Assistance program. This
program provides technically trained
advisors who are available 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year, to give
minor repair information or make
towing arrangements.
periods of time.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑10.
.
When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
.
.
Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
and a yellow fuel cap can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 9‑37. For all other vehicles,
For more information see Roadside
Assistance Program on page 13‑7.
Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-20
In Brief
OnStar®
] : Push this red emergency
button to get priority help from
specially trained OnStar emergency
advisors.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
If you have a current OnStar
subscription, press the Q button
and the current GPS location will be
sent to an OnStar advisor who will
assess your problem, contact
Roadside Assistance, and relay
your exact location to get the help
you need.
X : Push this button for hands‐free,
voice‐activated calling and to give
voice commands for turn‐by‐turn
navigation.
OnStar® uses several innovative
technologies and live advisors to
provide a wide range of safety,
security, navigation, diagnostics,
and calling services.
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle
Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,
Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation
and Hands‐Free Calling are
available on most vehicles. Not all
OnStar services are available on all
vehicles. For more information see
the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
Online Owner Center
The Online Owner Center is a
complimentary service that includes
online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner
manual, special privileges,
and more.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can
automatically alert an OnStar
advisor who is immediately
connected to the vehicle to see
if you need help.
Sign up today at:
www.chevyownercenter.com
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
www.onstar.ca (Canada),
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or
TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or
How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects you
to a specially trained OnStar advisor
to verify your account information
and to answer questions.
press Q to speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-21
For a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see
the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.
The OnStar system can record and
transmit vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to
Location information about the
vehicle is only available if the
GPS satellite signals are
unobstructed and available.
an OnStar call center when Q is
OnStar service is subject to the
OnStar terms and conditions
included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
The vehicle must have a working
electrical system, including
pressed, ] is pressed, or if the
airbags or ACR system deploy.
This information usually includes
the vehicle's GPS location and, in
the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the crash that
the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the
direction from which the vehicle was
hit). When the virtual advisor feature
of OnStar hands-free calling is
used, the vehicle also sends
adequate battery power, for the
OnStar equipment to operate. There
are other problems OnStar cannot
control that may prevent OnStar
from providing OnStar service at
any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important
parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,
tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
OnStar service cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area. OnStar service also
cannot work unless the vehicle is in
a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network
capacity and reception when the
service is needed, and technology
that is compatible with the OnStar
service. Not all services are
OnStar the vehicle's GPS location
so they can provide services where
it is located.
available everywhere, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas, or at
all times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-22
In Brief
OnStar Steering Wheel
Controls
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if
the OnStar advisor cannot be heard.
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to interact
with OnStar hands-free calling.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑3 for more information.
If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may
not be functioning properly.
Press Q and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear
(no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all
services have been deactivated.
On some vehicles, the mute button
can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
Press Q to confirm that the OnStar
equipment is active.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-1
Exterior Mirrors
Keys, Doors and
Windows
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Interior Mirrors
Keys and Locks
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-15
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Windows
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Doors
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-12
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2
Keys, Doors and Windows
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑17 for information
Keys and Locks
Keys
WARNING
{
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons. Children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
If there is a decrease in the
RKE operating range:
.
Check the distance. The
The key can be used for the ignition
and the driver's door. If the vehicle
is a taxi model, the key can also be
used in the trunk.
transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle.
.
Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
See your dealer if a replacement
key or additional key is needed.
.
Check the transmitter's battery.
Notice: If the keys get locked in
the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out.
Always carry a spare key.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
.
If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
If you are locked out of your vehicle,
contact Roadside Assistance. See
Roadside Assistance Program on
page 13‑7 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-3
vehicle using the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑5 for additional information.
to indicate unlocking has occurred.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑36.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter functions work up to
60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the
doors. If enabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), the
parking lamps flash once to indicate
locking has occurred. If enabled
through the DIC, the horn chirps
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter
disarms the content theft‐deterrent
system. See Anti-Theft Alarm
System on page 2‑12.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.
V (Remote Trunk Release):
Press and hold for about
one second to open the trunk. The
transmission must be in P (Park).
when Q is pressed again
within five seconds. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑36 for
additional information.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release to
locate the vehicle. The turn signal
lamps flash and the horn sounds
Pressing Q may arm the
content theft‐deterrent system.
See Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 2‑12.
three times. Press and hold L for
more than two seconds to activate
the panic alarm. The turn signal
lamps flash and the horn sounds
repeatedly for 30 seconds. The
alarm turns off when the ignition is
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
the driver door. If K is pressed
again within five seconds, all
remaining doors unlock. The interior
lamps come on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is
turned on. If enabled through the
DIC, the parking lamps flash twice
turned to ON/RUN or L is pressed
again. The ignition must be in
LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm
to work.
With Remote Start Shown, Without
Remote Start Similar
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For
vehicles with this feature, press to
start the engine from outside the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4
Keys, Doors and Windows
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message displays in the DIC.
See “REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY” under Key and Lock
Messages on page 5‑32 for
additional information.
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to the vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer.
When the replacement transmitter
is programmed to the vehicle, all
remaining transmitters must also
be programmed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters no longer work once
the new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to eight
transmitters programmed to it.
See your dealer to program new
transmitters.
Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of the
circuitry on the transmitter.
Static from your body could
damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a
flat, thin object, such as a flat
head screwdriver.
.
Carefully insert the tool into
the notch located along the
parting line of the
transmitter. Do not insert
the tool too far. Stop as
soon as resistance is felt.
.
Twist the tool until the
transmitter is separated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-5
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
Laws in some communities may
restrict the use of remote starters.
For example, some laws may
require a person using remote start
to have the vehicle in view when
doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting
of vehicles.
/ (Remote Start): This button will
be on the RKE transmitter if you
have remote start.
3. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing down. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
To start the vehicle using the
remote start feature:
4. Snap the transmitter back
together.
1. Aim the transmitter at the
vehicle.
Do not use the remote start feature
if your vehicle is low on fuel. Your
vehicle may run out of fuel.
2. Press and release Q, then
Remote Vehicle Start
immediately press and hold /
for two to four seconds or until
the vehicle's turn signal lamps
flash. The doors will lock.
Your vehicle may have a remote
starting feature that allows you to
start the engine from outside the
vehicle. It may also start the
vehicle's heating or air conditioning
systems and rear window defogger.
When the remote start system is
active and the vehicle has an
automatic climate control system,
it will automatically regulate the
inside temperature. Normal
If your vehicle has the remote start
feature, the RKE transmitter
functions will have an increased
range of operation. However, the
range may be less while the vehicle
is running.
When the vehicle starts, the
parking lamps turn on and
remain on while the engine is
running.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.
The remote start feature provides
two separate starts per ignition
cycle, each with 10 minutes of
engine running time, or one start
with a time extension. The first start
must expire or be canceled to get
two separate 10-minute starts.
operation of these systems will
return after the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6
Keys, Doors and Windows
.
.
.
Turn the ignition switch out of
LOCK/OFF and then back
to LOCK/OFF.
The oil pressure is low.
If it is the first remote start since the
vehicle has been driven, repeat the
previous steps, while the engine is
still running, to extend the engine
running time by 10 minutes from the
time you repeat the steps for remote
starting. The remote start running
time can be extended one time and
only after the first remote start.
The content theft-deterrent alarm
has been activated.
After the engine has been started
two times, or one time with a time
extension, the vehicle's ignition
must be turned to ON/RUN using
the key before the remote start
procedure can be used again. See
Ignition Positions on page 9‑16 for
information regarding the ignition
positions on your vehicle.
.
Two remote vehicle starts,
or one start with a time
extension, have already been
provided for that ignition cycle.
Door Locks
After entering the vehicle during a
remote start, insert and turn the key
to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
WARNING
{
The remote vehicle start feature will
not operate if any of the follow
occur:
The engine will shut off
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been
done or the vehicle's key is inserted
into the ignition switch and turned
to ON/RUN.
.
Passengers, especially
.
The vehicle's key is in the
ignition.
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash is increased if the
.
The vehicle's hood is open.
To manually shut off a remote start,
do any of the following.
.
The hazard warning flashers
are on.
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the
.
The check engine light is on.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 5‑17.
vehicle and press and release
the remote start button.
doors are not locked.
(Continued)
.
Turn on the hazard warning
.
The engine coolant temperature
is too high.
flashers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Power Door Locks
2-7
From the outside, use the key in
WARNING (Continued)
the driver door or use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to
lock and unlock the vehicle. From
the inside, use the manual or power
door locks.
So, all passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked whenever
the vehicle is driven.
To lock or unlock the driver side
door from the outside with the key,
insert the key and turn it clockwise
or counterclockwise.
.
Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
To lock or unlock the door from the
inside, push or pull the manual
lock knob.
A power door lock switch is
located on both front doors next to
the door handle.
.
Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this
from happening.
Press the top of the switch to unlock
all doors or press the bottom of the
switch to lock all doors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-8
Keys, Doors and Windows
If the vehicle has the optional
content theft-deterrent system and
it is armed, the power door lock
switches will be disabled. You must
use the RKE transmitter or the key
to unlock the doors when the
system is armed. See Anti-Theft
Alarm System on page 2‑12.
the doors will lock automatically
after several seconds. If any door is
opened before this, the timer will
reset itself once all the doors have
been closed again.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will automatically lock
when the shift lever is moved out of
P (Park). The automatic door locking
feature cannot be disabled.
Pressing the driver or passenger
power door lock switch again or the
RKE transmitter button will override
this feature.
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
The vehicle is programmed so that
when the shift lever is moved into
P (Park) all doors will unlock.
Delayed Locking
This feature allows the driver to
delay the actual locking of the
doors. When the driver power door
lock switch is pressed with the key
removed from the ignition, and the
driver door open, a chime will sound
three times to signal that the
Personal Choice Programming
The delayed locking feature can be
turned on or off, using the Driver
Information Center (DIC) to
program this feature. See “DELAY
DOOR LOCK” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑36.
With the vehicle stopped and the
engine running, door unlocking can
be programmed through prompts
displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). These prompts allow
the driver to choose various unlock
settings. For programming
delayed locking system is active.
When all doors have been closed,
information, see Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑36.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-9
To assist in finding the lock, the
vehicle has the following:
To open a rear door when the
security lock is on, do the following:
Lockout Protection
This feature helps prevent you from
locking the doors while the key is in
the ignition. Always remember to
take your key with you when exiting
the vehicle.
1. Unlock the door by using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, if the vehicle has
one, by pressing the power door
lock switch, or by lifting the rear
door manual lock.
If the lock switch is pressed on the
door that is open and the key is in
the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the open door will unlock.
A chime sounds continuously until
the driver door is closed.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door
security lock:
1. Unlock the door and open it from
the outside.
Safety Locks
Rear door security locks prevent
passengers from opening the rear
doors from the inside.
2. Insert the key into the security
lock slot and turn it so the slot is
in the vertical position.
To use the lock:
1. Insert the key into the security
lock slot and turn it so the slot is
in the horizontal position.
3. Do the same for the other
rear door.
The rear door security locks are
located on the inside edge of each
rear door. The rear doors must be
opened to access them.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same for the other
rear door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10
Keys, Doors and Windows
Doors
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Trunk
.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
WARNING
{
.
Close all of the windows.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑24.
.
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control
Trunk Release
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
To open the trunk from the outside,
press the trunk release button on
the RKE transmitter, if equipped.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-11
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release
Handle
G (Remote Trunk Release):
Press the button located next to the
exterior lamps control on the left
side of the instrument panel to open
the trunk. The shift lever must be in
P (Park).
Notice: Do not use the
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk
as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release
handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk
from the inside.
The trunk can also be opened by
lowering the rear seat and pulling
the emergency trunk release handle
located inside the trunk. See Rear
Seats (Split Folding) on page 3‑8
and “Emergency Trunk Release
Handle” following.
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk
release handle located on the latch
inside the trunk . This handle will
glow following exposure to light.
Pull the release handle to open the
trunk from the inside.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-12
Keys, Doors and Windows
Once armed, the alarm will go off if
someone tries to enter the vehicle
without using the RKE transmitter or
a key or turns the ignition on with an
incorrect key. The horn will sound
and the turn signal lamps will flash
for about 30 seconds.
Arming with the
RKE Transmitter
Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features; however, they do not make
it impossible to steal.
The alarm system will arm when
you use your RKE transmitter to
lock the doors, if the key is not in
the ignition.
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Your vehicle may have the optional
content theft-deterrent alarm
system.
Disarming with the
RKE Transmitter
When the alarm is armed, the
trunk may be opened with the
RKE transmitter. The power door
lock switches are disabled and the
doors remain locked. You must use
your RKE transmitter or your key to
unlock the doors when the system
is armed.
The alarm system will disarm when
you use your RKE transmitter to
unlock the doors.
To activate the theft-deterrent
system:
The first time a remote unlock
1. Open the door.
command is received, three flashes
will be seen and three horn chirps
heard to indicate an alarm condition
has occurred since last arming.
2. Lock the door with the
power door lock switch or the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. If you are using the
RKE transmitter, the door does
not need to be open.
Arming with the Power Lock
Switch
The alarm system will arm when
you use either power lock switch to
lock the doors while any door is
open and the key is removed from
the ignition. The alarm system will
not arm if the trunk is open when
you use either power lock switch to
lock the doors.
Disarming with Your Key
The alarm system will disarm
when you use your key to unlock
the doors or insert your key in
the ignition and turn it from the
LOCK/OFF position.
3. Close all doors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-13
The security light will come on if
there is a problem with arming or
disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
If the engine still does not start with
the other key, the vehicle needs
service. If the vehicle does start, the
first key may be faulty. See your
dealer who can service the
PASS-Key III+ to have a new
key made.
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑17 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
When the PASS-Key III+ system
senses that someone is using the
wrong key, it prevents the vehicle
from starting. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the
vehicle will be discouraged because
of the high number of electrical key
codes.
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
It is possible for the PASS-Key III+
decoder to learn the transponder
value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed
for the vehicle. The following
procedure is for programming
additional keys only. If all the
currently programmed keys are lost
or do not operate, you must see
your dealer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the
system.
Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+
(Personalized Automotive Security
System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key III+ is a passive
If the engine does not start and the
security light on the instrument
panel cluster comes on when trying
to start the vehicle, there may be a
problem with the theft-deterrent
system. Turn the ignition off and
try again.
theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed
when the key is removed from the
ignition.
The system is automatically
disarmed when the key is turned to
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,
or START from the LOCK/OFF
position.
If the engine still does not start,
and the key appears to be
undamaged, try another ignition key.
At this time, you may also want to
check the fuse. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 10‑34.
See your dealer or a locksmith who
can service PASS-Key III+ to get a
new key blank cut exactly as the
ignition key that operates the
system.
You do not have to manually arm or
disarm the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14
Keys, Doors and Windows
To program the new additional key:
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if
additional keys are to be
programmed.
Exterior Mirrors
1. Verify that the new key has a
1 stamped on it.
Convex Mirrors
If you lose or damage your
PASS-Key III+ key, see your dealer
or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key III+ to have a new
key made.
2. Insert the original, already
programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the
engine will not start, see your
dealer for service.
WARNING
{
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Do not leave the key or device
that disarms or deactivates
the theft-deterrent system in
the vehicle.
3. After the engine has started,
turn the key to LOCK/OFF,
and remove the key.
4. Insert the new key to be
programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within
five seconds of turning the
ignition to the LOCK/OFF
position in Step 3.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
The security light will turn off
once the key has been
programmed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-15
3. Adjust each outside mirror so
Power Mirrors
Interior Mirrors
that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen.
Manual Rearview Mirror
Keep the selector switch in the
center position when not adjusting
either outside mirror.
Adjust the inside rearview mirror
for a clear view of the area behind
your vehicle. To avoid glare of the
headlamps from behind, push the
tab forward for daytime and pull it
for nighttime use.
Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
Vehicles with OnStar® have three
additional control buttons located at
the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer for more information about
OnStar and how to subscribe to it.
See the OnStar Owner's Guide for
more information about the services
OnStar provides.
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the outside rearview
mirrors. See “Rear Window
Defogger” under Climate Control
Systems on page 8‑1 for more
information.
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are located on the driver
door armrest.
1. Press the left or right side of the
selector switch located above
the control pad, to select the
driver or passenger mirror.
2. Press one of the four buttons
located on the control pad to
move the mirror to the desired
direction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-16
Keys, Doors and Windows
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Windows
WARNING
{
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare from the headlamps of the
vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature comes on and the indicator
light illuminates each time the
ignition is turned to start.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the
The vehicle aerodynamics are
designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
pulsing sound when either rear
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open either a front window
or the sunroof (if equipped).
dimming feature on or off.
Vehicles with OnStar have three
additional control buttons for the
OnStar system. See your dealer for
more information about OnStar and
how to subscribe to it. See the
OnStar Owner Guide for more
information about the services
OnStar provides.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-17
The power window switches work
while the ignition is in ON/RUN,
ACC/ACCESSORY, or while
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑18.
Power Windows
WARNING
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keys is dangerous for many
reasons. Children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. The
windows will function and they
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a
vehicle with children.
To lower the window, press and
hold the front of the switch to the
first position until the window is at
the desired level. To raise the
window, pull up and hold the front of
the switch.
The switches on the driver door
armrest are used to control each of
the windows. Each passenger door
has its own window switch.
When there are children in the
rear seat use the window lockout
button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-18
Keys, Doors and Windows
Express-Down Window
Window Lockout
Sun Visors
The driver window switch has an
express-down feature labeled
AUTO. This lets you lower the
window completely without holding
the switch. Press the front of the
switch to the second position
and release.
o (Window Lockout): The driver
window switches also include a
lockout switch. Press the right side
of the switch to prevent the rear
passengers from using their window
switches. The driver can still control
all the windows and the front
passenger can control their own
window with the lockout on. Press
the left side of the switch to return to
normal window operation. A red bar
on the right side of the switch
To stop the window while it is
lowering, briefly pull up on
the switch.
indicates that the lockout is off.
Pull the sun visor down to block
glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount to pivot to the side
window, or to extend along the rod if
available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-19
Q (Vent/Express-Open): Press
this switch once to vent the sunroof
when it is closed. When using the
vent, the sunshade should be fully
opened. The sunshade can be
opened or closed manually by
sliding it rearward or forward.
R (Close): Press and hold this
switch until the sunroof motor stops
to close the sunroof, or release the
switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Roof
Sunroof
Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation, noise or plugging the
water drainage system. Periodically
open the sunroof and remove any
obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the
sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap,
and water. Do not remove grease
from sunroof.
From the vent position, press
this switch again to activate the
express-open feature. Press the
close switch to stop movement of
the sunroof. The sunshade will
automatically open when using
express‐open.
A deflector will automatically pop up
when the sunroof is opened. The
deflector will retract when the
sunroof is closed.
On vehicles with a sunroof, the
sunroof switches are on the
overhead console.
The sunroof can only be operated
when the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑18.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-20
Keys, Doors and Windows
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-46
Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-48
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-55
Securing Child Restraints
(Center Front Seat
Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Securing Child Restraints
(Right Front Seat
3-1
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-24
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Replacing Safety Belt System
Seats and
Restraints
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Airbag System
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-28
When Should an Airbag
Front Seats
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Adding Equipment to the
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Rear Seats
Rear Seats (Split Folding) . . . . . 3-8
Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-39
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-40
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2
Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
WARNING
{
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button located on top of the
seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The height of the head restraint can
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head
restraint to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to
be removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-3
Rear Seat
To move a manual seat forward or
rearward:
Front Seats
The vehicle's rear seat has head
restraints in the outboard seating
positions that cannot be adjusted.
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seats
The vehicle's rear seat has a
headrest in the center seating
position that cannot be adjusted.
WARNING
{
The rear seat head restraints and
headrest are not designed to be
removed.
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
1. Lift the bar under the front edge
of the seat cushion to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
Try to move the seat back and forth
to be sure the seat is locked in
place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4
Seats and Restraints
Center Seat
Power Seat Adjustment
Lumbar Adjustment
Manual Lumbar
The vehicle may have a front center
seat. There are cupholders on the
underside of the seat cushion.
To use them, flip the seat cushion
forward. The seat can also be used
as a storage area by lowering the
seatback. See Center Console
Storage on page 4‑2.
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
.
Move the seat forward or
Lift up or push down repeatedly on
the lever on the outboard side of the
driver seat to increase or decrease
lumbar support.
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
.
Raise or lower the front or rear
of the seat cushion by moving
the front or rear of the control up
or down.
The seatback doubles as an
armrest for the driver or front
passenger when the center seat is
unoccupied.
The driver seat may have power
reclining seatbacks. See “Power
Reclining Seatbacks” under
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5 for
more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-5
Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
{
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at
your pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is moving.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6
Seats and Restraints
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING
{
Power Reclining Seatbacks
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
To recline a manual seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
WARNING
{
To adjust a power seatback,
if equipped:
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
.
Tilt the top of the control
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
rearward to recline.
.
Tilt the top of the control forward
To return the seatback to the
upright position:
to raise.
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-7
Press the button once for the
Heated Front Seats
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the heated seat will
change to the next lower setting,
and then to the off setting. The
lights indicate two for the highest
setting and one for the lowest.
WARNING
{
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
cover or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
The heated seat are canceled
each time the ignition is turned off.
To use this feature after restarting
the vehicle, press the desired
button again.
If available, the heated seat buttons
are on the climate control panel.
The ignition must be on to operate
the heated seats.
Press L or M to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or
may damage the seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-8
Seats and Restraints
Rear Seats
Rear Seats (Split Folding)
Flip and Fold Feature
With this feature, the seat cushions
flip forward and the seatbacks fold
down to create an extended flat
cargo area.
To flip the seat cushion and fold the
seatback:
2. Flip the seat cushion forward by
pulling up on the tab in the
center of the seat cushion where
the seatback meets the seat
cushion.
3. Lower the seatback by pulling
forward on the tab on the
1. Make sure the front seats are
not reclined. The seat cushion
will not flip forward completely if
the front seats are reclined.
outboard side of the seatback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-9
To return the seats to the normal
position:
1. Raise the seatback and make
sure it latches.
3. Flip the bottom seat cushion
back into place. Push down
firmly on the seat cushion to
make sure it is secure.
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
When the seat is not in use, the
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts
are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
seatback should be placed in the
upright, locked position, and
the seat cushion should be in
the down position.
Under Seat Storage
The vehicle has a storage area
under the rear seat. See Rear
Storage on page 4‑2 for more
information.
2. Make sure the safety belts are
properly stowed over the
seatback in all three seating
positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-10
Seats and Restraints
In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
safety belts. Here is why:
Safety Belts
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.
WARNING
{
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
You never know if you will be in a
crash. If you do have a crash, you
do not know if it will be a
serious one.
WARNING
{
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
Do not let anyone ride where a
safety belt cannot be worn
safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, the injuries can be
much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be
ejected from the vehicle. You and
your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5‑14 for additional information.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
restrained properly too.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-11
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the
vehicle. The rider does not stop.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it is just a seat on wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-12
Seats and Restraints
With safety belts, you slow down
as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
The person keeps going until
stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not. But
your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety
belt, even if you are
upside down.
or the safety belts!
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-13
Q: If my vehicle has airbags,
why should I have to wear
safety belts?
Q: If I am a good driver, and
I never drive far from
home, why should I wear
safety belts?
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even
one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does
not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety belts
and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and
infants. If a child will be riding in the
vehicle, see Older Children on
page 3‑41 or Infants and Young
Children on page 3‑43. Follow those
rules for everyone's protection.
Most accidents occur within
40 km (25 miles) of home. And
the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at
speeds of less than
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
65 km/h (40 mph).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled
up can be thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-14
Seats and Restraints
First, before you or your
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information you
should know.
touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic
bones and you would be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force
on your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
Q: What is wrong with this?
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
protection this way.
Sit up straight and always keep your
feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-15
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
You can be seriously hurt if your
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
You can be seriously hurt if your
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap belt
and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose.
It will not give nearly as much
protection this way.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-16
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
{
You can be seriously injured if
your belt is buckled in the wrong
place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there,
not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the
A: The belt is over an armrest.
wrong buckle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
You can be seriously injured if
your belt goes over an armrest
like this. The belt would be much
too high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the
belt would apply too much force
to the ribs, which are not as
strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or
spleen. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-18
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
{
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too
far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
A: The belt is twisted across
the body.
WARNING
{
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-19
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
If the latch plate will not go fully
into the buckle, check if the
correct buckle is being used.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt except for
the center front passenger position
(if equipped), which has a lap belt.
See Lap Belt on page 3‑24 for more
information.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3‑24.
Engaging the child restraint
locking feature in the right front
seating position may affect the
passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑34.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see
“Seats” in the Index.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
in this section for instructions on
use and important safety
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
information.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-20
Seats and Restraints
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has shoulder belt height
adjusters for the driver and right
front passenger positions.
Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3‑13.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
belt is out of the way. If a door is
slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-21
You can move the adjuster up
just by pushing up on the shoulder
belt guide.
activation are met. And, if the
vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can
help tighten the safety belts in a
side crash.
After the adjuster is set to the
desired position, try to move it down
without squeezing the buttons to
make sure it has locked into
position.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the
vehicle's safety belt system. See
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
After a Crash on page 3‑25.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and
near frontal crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
Squeeze the buttons (A) on the
sides of the height adjuster and
move the height adjuster to the
desired position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-22
Seats and Restraints
Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
1. Pull the guide out from the
pocket on the edge of the
seatback.
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides for each
outboard passenger position in the
rear seat. If not, they are available
through your dealer. The guides
may provide added safety belt
comfort for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
positions the belt away from the
neck and head.
3. Be sure that the belt is not
twisted and it lies flat. The
elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
WARNING
{
2. Place the guide over the belt,
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-23
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
WARNING (Continued)
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Slide
the guide into the storage pocket on
the edge of the seatback.
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
4. Buckle, position, and release
the safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-24
Seats and Restraints
Buckle, position, and release it the
same way as the lap part of a
lap-shoulder belt.
Lap Belt
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
This section is only for the lap belt.
To learn how to wear a lap-shoulder
belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑19.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats.
To wear it, attach it to the regular
safety belt. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that comes
with the extender.
The vehicle may have a center
seating position. When you sit in the
center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has
no retractor.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free
end as shown until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see
Safety Belt Extender on page 3‑24.
Safety System Check
Make sure the release button on the
buckle is positioned so you would
be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch
plate and pull it along the belt.
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-25
from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer to have the
safety belt assemblies inspected
or replaced.
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash
WARNING
{
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 5‑14 for more
information.
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon
as possible.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑25.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑15.
Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
WARNING
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-26
Seats and Restraints
All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following
airbags:
WARNING
{
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
For frontal airbags, the word
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, but do not replace them.
Also, airbags are not designed to
deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an
Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑30.
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.
.
A frontal airbag for the right front
passenger.
.
A seat‐mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.
With seat‐mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
.
A seat‐mounted side impact
airbag for the right front
passenger.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and passenger directly behind
the driver.
With roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear along the
headliner or trim.
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the right
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
front passenger and passenger
seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-27
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Airbags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye.
Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge
of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 3‑41 or Infants
and Young Children on
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑15 for
more information.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
page 3‑43.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-28
Seats and Restraints
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger frontal
airbag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger side.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar
The driver frontal airbag is in the
middle of the steering wheel.
The seat‐mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-29
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories
that block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the
roof of a vehicle with roof-rail
airbags by routing a rope or
tie down through any door or
window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating roof-rail airbag
will be blocked.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, and second
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-30
Seats and Restraints
Frontal airbags may inflate at
different crash speeds. For
example:
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver's or
right front passenger's head and
chest. However, they are only
designed to inflate if the impact
exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how
severe a crash is likely to be in time
for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
.
If the vehicle hits a stationary
In addition, the vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
object, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a moving object.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full
.
If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object
that does not deform.
.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object
(like a pole), the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).
deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags. See
Airbag System on page 3‑26.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. Seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the
crash severity is above the system's
designed threshold level. The
threshold level can vary with
Whether the frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on
how fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how
quickly your vehicle slows down.
If the vehicle goes into an object
at an angle, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
specific vehicle design.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-31
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to
inflate in rollovers or rear impacts.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to deploy on the side of
the vehicle that is struck. Both
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Frontal
airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body.
Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and
roof-rail airbags will deploy when
either side of the vehicle is struck.
instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat‐mounted side impact airbags,
there are airbags modules in the
side of the front seatbacks closest
to the door. For vehicles with
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag
modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,
near the side windows that have
occupant seating positions.
In any particular crash, no one can
say whether an airbag should have
inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
For seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and
severity of the side impact.
But airbags would not help in
many types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 3‑30 for more information.
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-32
Seats and Restraints
There may be some smoke and
dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver from
seeing out of the windshield or
being able to steer the vehicle, nor
does it prevent people from leaving
the vehicle.
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates?
WARNING (Continued)
If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑31.
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn
on the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers, and shut off the
fuel system after the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn off the
interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers by using the controls for
those features.
WARNING
{
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
The parts of the airbag that
come into contact with you may be
warm, but not too hot to touch.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-33
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 13‑16 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13‑16.
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
WARNING
{
A crash severe enough to inflate
the airbags may have also
damaged important functions in
the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle.
.
Airbags are designed to inflate
.
Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for
service.
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-34
Seats and Restraints
vehicle from a distance, if equipped,
you may not see the system check.
When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or
the word OFF, or the symbol for on
or off, will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front
passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible
on the instrument panel when the
vehicle is started.
We recommend that children
be secured in a rear seat,
page 5‑16.
including: an infant or a child riding
in a rear-facing child restraint; a
child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbag,
seat‐mounted side impact airbags,
and roof‐rail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
United States
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part
of the right front passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag
should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, will be visible
during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-35
.
A right front passenger takes
his/her weight off of the seat for
a period of time.
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the right front
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
.
Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and
the passenger seat is in a
forward position.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑16.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag if:
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate) the
right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front passenger
seat. When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the
airbag is active.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag is turned off.
.
The right front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
.
The system determines that an
infant is present in a child
restraint.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-36
Seats and Restraints
For some children, including
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion,
If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint
children in child restraints, and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn
off the right front passenger frontal
airbag, depending upon the
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
person's seating posture and
body build. Everyone in the vehicle
who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into
the seat cushion.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the
vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head
restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 3‑2.
WARNING
{
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions provided
by the child restraint
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑15 for more
information, including important
safety information.
manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints (Rear
Seat Position) on page 3‑55 or
Securing Child Restraints
(Center Front Seat Position) on
page 3‑57 or Securing Child
Restraints (Right Front Seat
Position) on page 3‑58.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system may
or may not turn off the airbag for a
child in a child restraint depending
upon the child's seating posture and
body build. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-37
use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and
enable the right front passenger
frontal airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and
braking, which helps the passenger
sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
information about the importance of
proper restraint use.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such as
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
the right front passenger seat, but
the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens,
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
operates. We recommend that you
not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑39 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-38
Seats and Restraints
A wet seat can affect the
performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
The on indicator may be lit if an
object, such as a briefcase,
handbag, grocery bag, laptop or
other electronic device, is put on an
unoccupied seat. If this is not
desired, remove the object from
the seat.
To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13‑13.
.
The passenger sensing system
WARNING
{
may turn off the passenger
airbag when liquid is soaked into
the seat. If this happens, the off
indicator will be lit, and the
airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel will also be lit.
For up to 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off and the
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
WARNING
{
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
.
Liquid pooled on the seat that
has not soaked in may make it
more likely that the passenger
sensing system will enable
(turn on) the passenger airbag
while a child restraint or child
occupant is on the seat. If the
passenger airbag is turned on,
the on indicator will be lit.
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
the seat immediately. If the airbag
readiness light is lit, do not install a
child restraint or allow anyone to
occupy the seat. See Airbag
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are parts
of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have
information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system.
Readiness Light on page 5‑15 for
important safety information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-39
position, which includes sensors
that are part of the passenger's
seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate properly
if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle.
Any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a
comfort enhancing pad or
device, installed under or on
top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the
Step Two of the Customer
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on
page 13‑1.
Q: Because I have a disability,
I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
A: Yes. If you add things that
change the vehicle's frame,
bumper system, height, front end
or side sheet metal, they may
keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or
moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the
A: If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on
page 13‑1.
passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑34.
In addition, your dealer and the
service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
airbag system.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger
If you have any questions, call
Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-40
Seats and Restraints
If an airbag inflates, you will need
to replace airbag system parts.
See your dealer for service.
Airbag System Check
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance or
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working.
See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑15 for more information.
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly.
Have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light
WARNING
{
A crash can damage the
airbag systems in your vehicle.
A damaged airbag system
may not work properly and
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure your airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the
airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
on page 5‑15 for more information.
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon
as possible.
Inflate? on page 3‑31.
See your dealer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-41
.
Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat state the
weight and height limitations for that
booster. Use a booster seat with a
lap-shoulder belt until the child
passes the fit test below:
Child Restraints
Older Children
.
Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑19 for more information.
If the shoulder belt still does not
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat.
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle's safety belts.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑19.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-42
Seats and Restraints
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Never do this.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the
two children can be crushed
together and seriously injured.
A safety belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly.
In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-43
Infants and Young
Children
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
{
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants and
all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts
offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-44
Seats and Restraints
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING (Continued)
If you must secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go.
WARNING
{
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be
WARNING
{
Never do this.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat.
secured in an appropriate
restraint.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-45
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
The restraint manufacturer's
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
WARNING
{
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle's
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low
on the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
WARNING
{
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not
fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-46
Seats and Restraints
Child Restraint Systems
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
(C) Booster Seats
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child's
body with the harness.
A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
designed to improve the fit of the
vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help
a child to see out the window.
(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the seating
surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the
infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned
in the restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-47
endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle.
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) website to
locate the nearest child safety seat
inspection station. For CPST
availability in Canada, check with
Transport Canada or the Provincial
Ministry of Transportation office.
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not
WARNING
{
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle's safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
WARNING
{
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint
in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or
by the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑50 for
more information. Children can be
In some areas, Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technicians
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
and demonstrate how to
correctly use and install child
restraints. In the U.S., refer to the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-48
Seats and Restraints
A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
WARNING (Continued)
The vehicle may have a
passenger sensing system which
is designed to turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
under certain conditions.
WARNING
{
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the right front
Even if the passenger sensing
system, if equipped, has turned
off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, no system is
fail-safe. No one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-49
Depending on where you place the
child restraint and the size of the
child restraint, you may not be able
to access adjacent safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for
additional passengers or child
restraints. Adjacent seating
positions should not be used if the
child restraint prevents access to or
interferes with the routing of the
safety belt.
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
{
A child in a child restraint in the
center front seat can be badly
injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never
secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always
better to secure a child restraint
in a rear seat.
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Wherever a child restraint is
installed, be sure to secure the
child restraint properly.
Do not use child restraints in the
center front seat position.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑34 for additional
information.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with your
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
Child restraints and booster seats
vary considerably in size, and some
may fit in certain seating positions
better than others. Always make
sure the child restraint is properly
secured.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-50
Seats and Restraints
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
In order to use the LATCH system in
your vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in
the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use
with the LATCH system.
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the
top tether and anchor.
attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-51
Your child restraint may have a
single tether (A) or a dual tether (C).
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the
top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use
with or without the top tether
being attached. Others require the
top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for your
child restraint.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are
two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top
of the child restraint to the vehicle.
A top tether anchor is built into
the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving
or in a crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-52
Seats and Restraints
The top tether anchors are located
under the covers on the rear
seatback filler panel behind each
head restraint. Be sure to use an
anchor located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be
placed.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
To assist you in locating the lower
anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
Rear Seat
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
To assist you in locating the top
tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the cover.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-53
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 3‑48 for
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
{
that came with the child restraint
and the instructions in this
manual.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
additional information.
WARNING
{
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
Do not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only
WARNING
{
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
restraint properly using the
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
one child restraint per anchor.
anchors, or use the vehicle's
safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-54
Seats and Restraints
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten
the top tether according to
your child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
2.2. Push on the depression
at the rear of the cover and
swing the lid open to
expose the top tether
anchor.
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the
child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to
your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest and
you are using a single
tether, route the tether over
the head restraint.
1.1. Find the lower anchors
for the desired seating
position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the
lower attachments on
the child restraint to the
lower anchors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-55
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints
Parts After a Crash
(Rear Seat Position)
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is
WARNING
{
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
death in a crash. To help make
sure the LATCH system is
working properly after a crash,
see your dealer to have the
system inspected and any
necessary replacements made
as soon as possible.
compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑50 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑50 for top tether anchor
locations.
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest and
you are using a dual tether,
route the tether around the
head restraint.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side‐to‐side and
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
back‐and‐forth. There should
be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement, for proper
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
installation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-56
Seats and Restraints
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 3‑48.
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-57
6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑50 for more
information.
Securing Child Restraints
(Center Front Seat
Position)
WARNING
{
A child in a child restraint in the
center front seat can be badly
injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never
secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always
better to secure a child restraint
in a rear seat.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side‐to‐side and
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
back‐and‐forth. When the
child restraint is properly
installed, there should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement.
Do not use child restraints in the
center front seat position.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a
top tether anchor, disconnect it.
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-58
Seats and Restraints
Securing Child Restraints
(Right Front Seat
Position)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint.
See Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3‑48.
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑34 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑16 for more information,
including important safety
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑34 for additional
information.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑50 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see for top tether
anchor locations.
information.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-59
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag,
the off indicator on the
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
passenger airbag status
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
indicator should light and stay
lit when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑16.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-60
Seats and Restraints
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt
to move it side‐to‐side and
back‐and‐forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator
in the passenger airbag status
indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see
“If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑34 for more
information.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-1
Sunglasses Storage
A storage compartment for
sunglasses may be located above
the rearview mirror. Push on the
cover to open the compartment.
Storage
Compartments
Storage
Storage Compartments
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to
open it.
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2
Armrest Storage
For vehicles with a rear seat
armrest, pull the tab on the armrest
forward to access it.
Cupholders
Cupholders may be built into the
front center console, front portion of
the front center seat, and rear
armrest of the vehicle.
Additional Storage Features
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2
Storage
Rear Storage
Center Console Storage
Additional Storage
Features
For vehicles with a split folding rear
seat, there are two storage areas
underneath. Pull the tab(s) located
by the passenger side safety belt
buckle and the driver side rear seat
to access the storage areas. See
Rear Seats (Split Folding) on
For vehicles with a front center
console storage area, open it by
pulling up on the latch located
in the front of the console cover.
There may be a removable tray
inside.
Convenience Net
For vehicles with a convenience net,
it is located in the rear. Use it to
store small loads as far forward as
possible. The net should not be
used to store heavy loads.
page 3‑8 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Information Displays
5-1
Engine Coolant Temperature
Instruments and
Controls
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-14
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-15
Passenger Airbag Status
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Brake System Messages . . . . 5-29
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Engine Cooling System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-31
Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-31
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-32
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-32
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-33
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-34
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-35
Vehicle Reminder
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-16
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-21
Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning Light . . . . . . . 5-21
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-23
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-24
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2
Instruments and Controls
To adjust the steering wheel:
Vehicle Personalization
Controls
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-36
1. Hold the wheel and pull the lever
toward you.
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-42
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Universal Remote System
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
3. Release the lever to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
The tilt wheel lever is located on the
left side of the steering column.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-3
SRCE (Source): Press to choose
between the radio (AM, FM, XM),
CD, and auxiliary input jack.
Steering Wheel Controls
w (Next): Press to go to the next
radio station stored as a favorite,
or the next track if a CD is playing.
c x (Previous/End): Press to
go to the previous radio station
stored as a favorite, go to the next
track if a CD is playing, reject an
incoming call, or end a current call.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to
increase or to decrease the
radio volume.
¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next
radio station while in AM, FM,
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to
silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar® or
Bluetooth® systems, press and hold
b g for longer than two seconds to
interact with those systems.
See the OnStar Owner's Guide
and Bluetooth on page 7‑20 for
more information.
or XM™. Press ¨ to go to the
next track or chapter while
sourced to the CD.
Horn
Vehicles with audio steering wheel
controls could differ depending on
the vehicle's options. Some audio
controls can be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
Press near or on the horn symbols
on the steering wheel pad to sound
the horn.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4
Instruments and Controls
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN for
this to work. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑22.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
Turn the band up for more
frequent wipes or down for
less frequent wipes.
WARNING
{
6 (Low Speed): Slow
wipes.
In freezing weather, do not use
your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
? (High Speed): Fast wipes.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
should be replaced. See Wiper
windshield, blocking your vision.
When the vehicle is low on washer
fluid, the WASHER FLUID LOW
ADD FLUID displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) for
60 seconds. When the ignition is
turned off, this message displays
again for three seconds to remind
you that the fluid level is low.
Blade Replacement on page 10‑27.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol
to control the windshield wipers.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
stop the motor until it cools down.
8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn to 8,
then release. Several wipes, hold
Windshield Washer
the band on 8 longer.
Push the paddle L at the top of the
lever to spray washer fluid on the
windshield. The wipers run for
several sweeps and then either
stop or return to the preset speed.
The ignition key must be in
9 (Off): Turns the windshield
Until the fluid reservoir is refilled,
every time the vehicle is started, the
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
message displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) for
wipers off.
60 seconds. See Washer Fluid
Messages on page 5‑36.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-5
Compass variance is the difference
Compass
Your vehicle may have a compass
in the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
between the earth's magnetic north
and true geographic north. If the
compass is not set to the zone
where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass
must be set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is traveling.
Compass Zone
Your dealer will set the correct zone
for your location.
To adjust for compass variance, use
the following procedure:
Under certain circumstances, such
as during a long distance
Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure
cross-country trip or moving to a
new state or province, it will be
necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the
zone through the DIC if the zone is
not set correctly.
2. Find the vehicle's current
location and variance zone
number on the map.
1. Do not set the compass zone
when the vehicle is moving.
Only set it when the vehicle is
in P (Park).
Zones 1 through 15 are
available.
Press the vehicle information
3. Press the set/reset button to
scroll through and select the
appropriate variance zone.
button until PRESS V TO
CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
displays.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until
the vehicle heading, for
example, N for North, is
displayed in the DIC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-6
Instruments and Controls
5. If calibration is necessary,
calibrate the compass.
If the DIC display does not show a
heading, for example, N for North,
or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a
strong magnetic field interfering with
the compass. Such interference
may be caused by a magnetic CB or
cell phone antenna mount, a
magnetic emergency light, magnetic
note pad holder, or any other
magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,
move the magnetic item, then turn
on the vehicle and calibrate the
compass.
Do not operate any switches
such as window, sunroof,
climate controls, seats, etc.
during the calibration procedure.
See “Compass Calibration
Procedure” following.
2. Press the vehicle information
Compass Calibration
button until PRESS V TO
CALIBRATE COMPASS
displays.
The compass can be manually
calibrated. Only calibrate the
compass in a magnetically clean
and safe location, such as an open
parking lot, where driving the
vehicle in circles is not a danger.
It is suggested to calibrate away
from tall buildings, utility wires,
manhole covers, or other industrial
structures, if possible.
3. Press the set/reset button to
start the compass calibration.
4. The DIC will display
CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle
in tight circles at less than
8 km/h (5 mph) to complete the
calibration. The DIC will display
CALIBRATION COMPLETE
for a few seconds when the
calibration is complete. The
DIC display will then return to
To calibrate the compass, use the
following procedure:
If CAL should ever appear in the
DIC display, the compass should
be calibrated.
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass,
make sure the compass zone is
set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is located.
See “Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure” earlier in this
section.
PRESS V TO CALIBRATE
COMPASS.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-7
2. To increase or decrease the
time, do one of the following
while the hours or minutes
are flashing:
To change the time default setting
from 12 hour to 24 hour, press the
H button until 12H or 24H is
Clock
Without Date Display
displayed. Once 12H or 24H is
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single
CD Player
displayed, turn the f knob to the
desired option to select the setting.
.
Turn the f knob.
.
This radio has a H button for setting
the time.
Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.
Press the H button again to apply
the setting, or let the screen
time out.
.
Press \ FWD or s REV.
To set the time:
3. Press the H button again until
the clock display stops flashing
to set the currently displayed
time, or wait five seconds until
the flashing stops and the
current time displayed is
1. Press the H button until the
hour begins flashing on the
display. Press H a second time
and the minutes begin flashing
on the display.
automatically set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-8
Instruments and Controls
4. To increase the time or date, do
one of the following:
To change the time default setting
from 12 hour to 24 hour or to
change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
With Date Display
Single CD (MP3) Player
.
Press the pushbutton below
This radio has a H button for
setting the time.
the selected tab.
1. Press the H button and then
the pushbutton located under
the forward arrow tab. The time
12H and 24H, and the date
MM/DD/YYYY (month, day,
and year) and DD/MM/YYYY
(day, month, and year) displays.
.
Turn the f knob clockwise.
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the radio on.
.
Press ¨ SEEK.
.
Press \ FWD.
2. Press the H button and the
HR, MIN, MM, DD, and YYYY
(hour, minute, month, day,
and year) display.
5. To decrease the time or date,
do one of the following:
2. Press the pushbutton located
under the desired option.
.
Turn the f knob
counter‐clockwise.
3. Press the pushbutton located
under any one of the tabs to
be changed.
3. Press the H or MENU button
again to apply the selected
default, or let the screen
time out.
.
Press © SEEK.
.
Press s REV.
The date does not automatically
display. To see the date press the
H button while the radio is on. The
date with display times out after a
few seconds and goes back to the
normal radio and time display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-9
Notice: Hanging heavy
Power Outlets
WARNING (Continued)
equipment from the power outlet
can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty. The
power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only, such
as cell phone charge cords.
The vehicle has three 12‐volt outlets
which can be used to plug in
electrical equipment, such as a cell
phone or MP3 player.
vehicle is not in use because the
vehicle could catch fire and cause
injury or death.
On vehicles with a center console,
one outlet is located inside the
center floor console and two outlets
are located at the front of the
console bin under the instrument
panel.
Notice: Leaving electrical
equipment plugged in for an
extended period of time while
the vehicle is off will drain the
battery. Always unplug electrical
equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
rating.
Cigarette Lighter
The vehicle may have a cigarette
lighter. The cigarette lighter may be
located in the console, if the vehicle
has one; otherwise, it may be
located in the center armrest of
the front seat.
On vehicles without a center
console, two are located under the
climate controls and another outlet
for the rear seat passengers is at
the rear of the center front seat.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
in while it is heating does not let
the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating can
occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be
Certain accessory plugs may not be
compatible with the accessory
power outlet and could overload
vehicle and adapter fuses. If a
problem is experienced, see
your dealer.
Remove the cover to access and
replace when not in use.
WARNING
{
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included
with the equipment. See Add-On
Electrical Equipment on page 9‑47.
blown. Do not hold a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating.
Power is always supplied to the
outlets. Do not leave electrical
equipment plugged in when the
To use the lighter, just push it in all
the way and let go. When it is ready,
it will pop back out by itself.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-10
Instruments and Controls
Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
Ashtrays
Warning Lights,
Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can
signal that something is wrong
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
The vehicle may have an ashtray.
The ashtray may be located in the
console, if the vehicle has one;
otherwise, it may be located in the
center armrest of the front seat.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other
flammable items are put in the
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage the
vehicle. Never put flammable
items in the ashtray.
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-11
Instrument Cluster
English Uplevel Shown, Base and Metric Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-12
Instruments and Controls
Speedometer
Tachometer
Fuel Gauge
The speedometer shows the
vehicle's speed in both kilometers
per hour (km/h) and miles per
hour (mph).
The tachometer displays the
engine speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Notice: If the engine is operated
with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area, the vehicle could
be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning area.
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven in either
miles (used in the United States) or
in kilometers (used in Canada).
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
odometer. If the odometer displays
ERROR, it probably has been
tampered with and the numbers
might not be accurate.
English
If the vehicle needs a new odometer
installed, it must be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer.
If that is not possible, then it will be
set at zero and a label must be put
on the driver door to show the old
mileage reading of the vehicle when
the new odometer was installed.
Metric
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-13
When the ignition is on, the fuel
gauge indicates about how much
fuel is left in the fuel tank.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates the side of the vehicle
the fuel door is on.
Here are four things that some
owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
.
At the gas station, the gas pump
shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
Metric
.
It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature. If the
English
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the fuel tank's capacity to
fill the tank.
gauge pointer moves toward the
“H” (United States) or torward the
shaded thermostat (Canada), it
means that the engine coolant has
overheated. If the vehicle has been
operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop
the vehicle, and turn off the engine
as soon as possible.
.
The gauge moves a little when
while turning a corner or
speeding up.
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑19 for more information.
.
The gauge does not go back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-14
Instruments and Controls
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminders
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
Several seconds after the engine is
started, a chime sounds for several
seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety
belt. This only occurs if the
passenger airbag is enabled.
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑34 for more information. The
passenger safety belt reminder light,
located on the instrument panel,
comes on and stays on for several
seconds and then flashes for
several more.
When the engine is started, a
chime sounds for several seconds
to remind a driver to fasten the
safety belt, unless the driver safety
belt is already buckled.
This chime and light are repeated if
the passenger remains unbuckled
and the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt
reminder light and chime may turn
on if an object is put on the seat
such as a briefcase, handbag,
grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the
reminder light and/or chime, remove
the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt.
The safety belt light comes on and
stays on for several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
This chime and light are repeated if
the driver remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled,
neither the chime nor the light
comes on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-15
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag's
electrical system for possible
WARNING (Continued)
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
malfunctions. If the light stays on
it indicates there is an electrical
problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the
pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system,
see Airbag System on page 3‑26.
The airbag readiness light flashes
for a few seconds when the engine
is started. If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed immediately.
If there is a problem with the airbag
system, an airbag Driver Information
Center (DIC) message can also
come on. See Airbag System
Messages on page 5‑33 for more
information.
WARNING
{
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-16
Instruments and Controls
as a system check. If you are using
remote start, if equipped, to start the
vehicle from a distance, you may
not see the system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the
status indicator will light either
ON or OFF, or either the on or off
symbol to let you know the status of
the right front passenger frontal
airbag.
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
The vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑34 for
important safety information. The
instrument panel has a passenger
airbag status indicator.
WARNING
{
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑15 for more
information, including important
safety information.
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right
front passenger frontal airbag is
enabled (may inflate).
Charging System Light
United States
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
lit on the airbag status indicator, it
means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system.
This light comes on briefly when the
ignition key is turned to START, but
the engine is not running, as a
check to show it is working.
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
See your dealer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-17
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
control systems. It ensures that
emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this light
on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well,
the vehicle fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
The light should go out once the
engine starts. If it stays on,
or comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the
charging system. A charging system
message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) can also appear.
See Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages on page 5‑29 for more
information. This light could indicate
that there are problems with a
generator drive belt, or that there is
an electrical problem. Have it
checked right away. If the vehicle
must be driven a short distance with
the light on, turn off accessories,
such as the radio and air
Notice: Modifications made to the
engine, transmission, exhaust,
intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement
of the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/
Maintenance test. See
This light should come on when the
ignition is on, but the engine is not
running, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
comes on and stays on while the
engine is running, this indicates that
there is an OBD II problem and
service is required.
conditioner.
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-18
Instruments and Controls
.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might
be required.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction
might be corrected:
.
Make sure the fuel cap is fully
To prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle:
installed. See Filling the Tank on
page 9‑38. The diagnostic
system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn
the light off.
.
If one or more of these
Reduce vehicle speed.
conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper
fuel to turn the light off.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
.
If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled as
soon as it is possible.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑35.
If the light continues to flash, when
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park the
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
least 10 seconds, and restart the
engine. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and
see your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
.
If none of the above have made the
light turn off, your dealer can check
the vehicle. The dealer has the
proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
If the vehicle has been driven
through a deep puddle of water,
the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is
usually corrected when the
electrical system dries out.
A few driving trips should turn
the light off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-19
The vehicle may not pass
inspection if:
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Brake System Warning
Light
.
The malfunction indicator lamp is
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have programs to
inspect the on-vehicle emission
control equipment. For the
inspection, the emission system
test equipment is connected to
the vehicle’s Data Link
The vehicle brake system consists
of two hydraulic circuits. If one
circuit is not working, the remaining
circuit can still work to stop the
vehicle. For normal braking
performance, both circuits need
to be working
on with the engine running, or if
the light does not come on when
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
while the engine is off.
.
The critical emission control
systems have not been
Connector (DLC).
completely diagnosed by the
system. This can happen if the
battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has
run down. The diagnostic system
evaluates critical emission
control systems during normal
driving. This can take
If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away.
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection, your dealer can
prepare the vehicle for
The DLC is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
wheel. See your dealer if assistance
is needed.
English
Metric
This light should come on briefly
when the engine is started. If it does
not come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn if there is
a problem.
inspection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-20
Instruments and Controls
When the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light also comes on
when the parking brake is set. The
light stays on if the parking brake
does not fully release. If it stays on
after the parking brake is fully
released, it means the vehicle has
a brake problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the
ignition off. If the light comes on
while driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition
off. Then start the engine again to
reset the system. If the ABS light
stays on, or comes on again while
driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning
light is not on, the vehicle still has
brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑19.
WARNING (Continued)
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.
If the light comes on while driving,
pull off the road and stop carefully.
The pedal might be harder to push,
or the pedal can go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
vehicle towed for service. See
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑74.
See Brake System Messages on
page 5‑29 for all brake related
DIC messages.
WARNING
{
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
light comes on briefly when the
engine is started.
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-21
If the light stays on, or comes
on while driving a SERVICE
STABILITRAK message appears in
the DIC. This indicates that there
may be a problem with the
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)
Indicator Light
Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system and the vehicle may need
service. When this warning light is
on and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message appears on the DIC, the
ESC system does not assist in
controlling the vehicle.
For vehicles with a Traction Control
System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®
warning light, this light comes on
briefly when the engine is started.
This light comes on briefly while the
engine is started. If it does not, have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the
indicator light will then go off.
When the system is active, the light
flashes while the system is assisting
in controlling the vehicle.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
See Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 9‑31 and Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5‑32 for more information.
This light can come on after the
vehicle is first driven and the
STABILITRAK NOT READY
message appears in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
page 9‑31 for more information.
When the system is active, the light
flashes while the system is limiting
wheel spin or assisting with
controlling the vehicle.
If it stays on or comes on while
driving a SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL message appears in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-22
Instruments and Controls
This indicates that there could be a
problem with the traction control
system and the vehicle may need
service. When this warning light is
on and the SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL message appears on
the DIC, the system does not limit
wheel spin.
The engine coolant temperature
warning light comes on when the
engine has overheated.
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Warning Light
If this happens pull over and turn off
the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑19 for more information.
If the traction control system is
Tire Pressure Light
manually turned off, this light comes
on and the TRACTION CONTROL
OFF message appears on the DIC.
This light comes on briefly while
starting the vehicle.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑29 and Ride Control
System Messages on page 5‑32 for
more information.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by the dealer. If the system
is working normally the indicator
light goes off.
For vehicles with a Tire Pressure
Monitor System, this light comes on
briefly when the engine is started.
It provides information about tire
pressures and the Tire Pressure
Monitor System.
Notice: Driving with the engine
coolant temperature warning light
on could cause the vehicle to
overheat. See Engine Overheating
on page 10‑19. The vehicle's
engine could be damaged, and it
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature
warning light on.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of
the tires are significantly
underinflated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-23
A tire pressure message can
accompany the light. See Tire
Messages on page 5‑34 for more
information. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the
pressure value shown on the Tire
and Loading Information Label.
See Tire Pressure on page 10‑44
for more information.
dealer. If the system is working
normally, the indicator light then
goes off.
Engine Oil Pressure Light
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might
have some other system problem.
WARNING
{
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is On Steady
Security Light
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
This indicates that there may be a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on
steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
For information regarding this light
and the vehicle's security system,
see Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 2‑12.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
Operation on page 10‑47 for
more information.
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-24
Instruments and Controls
The lights go out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 6‑5 for more
information.
High-Beam on Light
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Cruise Control Light
All messages will appear in the
DIC display located below the
speedometer in the instrument
panel cluster. The DIC buttons are
located on the instrument panel, to
the right of the instrument panel
cluster.
This light comes on when the
high-beam headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑3 for more
information.
The cruise control light comes on
whenever the cruise control is set.
Front Fog Lamp Light
The DIC comes on when the ignition
is on. After a short delay, the DIC
will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
The light goes out when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑32 for more
information.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and
vehicle system information, and
warning messages if a system
problem is detected. The bottom line
of the DIC shows the shift lever
position indicator. See Automatic
Transmission on page 9‑25 for
more information.
The fog lamp lights come on when
the fog lamps are in use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-25
If your vehicle has these features,
the DIC also displays the compass
direction and the outside air
temperature when viewing the trip
and fuel information. The compass
direction appears on the top right
corner of the DIC display.
The outside air temperature
automatically appears in the bottom
right corner of the DIC display.
If there is a problem with the system
that controls the temperature
display, the numbers will be
replaced with dashes. If this occurs,
have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer.
DIC Buttons
T (Vehicle Information): Press
this button to display the oil life,
units, tire pressure readings, and
compass zone and compass
calibration on vehicles with
this feature.
U (Customization): Press this
button to customize the feature
settings on your vehicle.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑36 for more information.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to
set or reset certain functions and to
turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle
information, customization, and
set/reset buttons. The button
functions are detailed in the
following pages.
The DIC also allows some features
to be customized. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑36 for
more information.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this
button to scroll through the following
menu items:
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this
button to display the odometer, trip
odometers, fuel range, average
economy, instantaneous economy,
Active Fuel Management™ indicator
on vehicles with this feature, and
average speed.
DIC Operation and Displays
Odometer
The DIC has different displays
which can be accessed by pressing
the DIC buttons located on the
instrument panel, to the right of the
instrument panel cluster.
Press the trip/fuel button until
ODOMETER displays. This display
shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-26
Instruments and Controls
Trip A and Trip B
since the ignition was last turned on
and the vehicle was moving. Once
the vehicle begins moving, the trip
odometer will accumulate mileage.
For example, if the vehicle was
driven 8 km (5 miles) before it is
started again, and then the
The fuel range estimate is based on
an average of the vehicle's fuel
economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in
the fuel tank. This estimate will
change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and
making frequent stops, this display
may read one number, but if the
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the
number may change even though
the same amount of fuel is in the
fuel tank. This is because different
driving conditions produce different
fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel
Press the trip/fuel button until
TRIPA or TRIP B displays. This
display shows the current distance
traveled in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) since the last reset
for each trip odometer. Both trip
odometers can be used at the
same time.
retro-active reset feature is
activated, the display will show
8 km (5 miles). As the vehicle
begins moving, the display will then
increase to 8.2 km (5.1 miles),
8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.
Each trip odometer can be reset to
zero separately by pressing the
set/reset button while the desired
trip odometer is displayed.
If the retro-active reset feature is
activated after the vehicle is started,
but before it begins moving, the
display will show the number of
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that
were driven during the last
ignition cycle.
The trip odometer has a feature
called the retro-active reset. This
can be used to set the trip odometer
to the number of miles (kilometers)
driven since the ignition was last
turned on. This can be used if the
trip odometer is not reset at the
beginning of the trip.
economy than city driving.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the
FUEL LEVEL LOW message
displays. See Fuel System
Messages on page 5‑32 for
more information.
Fuel Range
Press the trip/fuel button until
FUEL RANGE displays. This
display shows the approximate
number of remaining miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) the vehicle can be
driven without refueling.
To use the retro-active reset feature,
press and hold the set/reset button
for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-27
Average Economy
Average Speed
life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that
means 99% of the current oil life
remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a
schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG
ECONOMY displays. This display
shows the approximate average
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This
number is calculated based on the
number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded
since the last time this menu item
was reset. To reset this display
to zero, press and hold the
Press the trip/fuel button until
AVERAGE SPEED displays. This
display shows the average speed of
the vehicle in miles per hour (mph)
or kilometers per hour (km/h). This
average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded
since the last reset of this value.
To reset the value, press and hold
the set/reset button. The display will
return to zero.
When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display.
See Engine Oil Messages on
page 5‑31. You should change the
oil as soon as possible. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the
engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See
set/reset button.
Instantaneous Economy
Blank Display
Press the trip/fuel button until INST
ECONOMY displays. This display
shows the current fuel economy at a
particular moment and will change
frequently as driving conditions
change. This display shows the
instantaneous fuel economy in
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike
average economy, this screen
cannot be reset.
This display shows no information.
Vehicle Information Menu
Items
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 for more information.
T (Vehicle Information): Press
this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
Remember, you must reset the OIL
LIFE yourself after each oil change.
It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed.
Oil Life
Press the vehicle information
button until OIL LIFE REMAINING
displays. This display shows an
estimate of the oil's remaining useful
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-28
Instruments and Controls
It cannot be reset accurately until
the next oil change. To reset the
engine oil life system, see Engine
Oil Life System on page 10‑10.
If a low tire pressure condition is
detected by the system while
Vehicle Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC
to notify the driver that the status of
the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the
driver to correct the condition.
Multiple messages may appear one
after another. Some messages may
not require immediate action, but
you can press the set/reset button
to acknowledge that you received
the message and clear it from the
DIC display. Pressing any of the
DIC buttons also acknowledges and
clears any messages. Some
driving, a message advising you to
add air to a specific tire will appear
in the display. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑44 and Tire Messages on
page 5‑34 for more information.
Units
Press the vehicle information button
until UNITS displays. This display
allows you to select between
English or Metric units of
measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button
to select between ENGLISH or
METRIC units.
If the tire pressure display shows
dashes instead of a value, there
may be a problem with your vehicle.
If this consistently occurs, see your
dealer for service.
Change Compass Zone
Your vehicle may have this feature.
To change the compass zone
through the DIC, see Compass on
page 5‑5.
Tire Pressure
messages cannot be cleared from
the DIC display because they are
more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be
cleared. You should take any
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), the
pressure for each tire can be viewed
in the DIC. The tire pressure will be
shown in either pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press
the vehicle information button until
the DIC displays FRONT TIRES
PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press
the vehicle information button again
until the DIC displays REAR TIRES
PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
Calibrate Compass
Your vehicle may have this feature.
The compass can be manually
calibrated. To calibrate the compass
through the DIC, see Compass on
page 5‑5.
messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember that
clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not
correct the problem. The following
are the possible messages that can
be displayed and some information
about them.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-29
SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM
Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages
Door Ajar Messages
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when there
is a problem with the generator and
battery charging systems. Driving
with this problem could drain the
battery. Turn off all unnecessary
accessories. Stop and turn off the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. Have the electrical system
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the
driver door is not closed properly.
Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
This message displays when the
system detects that the battery
voltage is dropping beyond a
reasonable level. The battery saver
system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may
be able to notice. At the point that
the features are disabled, this
message is displayed. It means
that the vehicle is trying to save the
charge in the battery.
HOOD OPEN
If your vehicle has the remote start
feature, this message displays when
the hood is not closed properly.
Make sure that the hood is closed
completely. See Hood on page 10‑5.
checked by your dealer immediately.
Brake System Messages
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays when
service is required on the brake
system. Have the brake system
serviced by your dealer as soon as
possible. The brake system warning
light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster when this message
appears on the DIC. See Brake
System Warning Light on
Turn off all unnecessary
accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
This message displays when the
driver side rear door is not closed
properly. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
The normal battery voltage range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the
front passenger door is not closed
properly. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
page 5‑19.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-30
Instruments and Controls
You can continue to drive your
vehicle. If this message continues to
appear, have the system repaired
by your dealer as soon as possible
to avoid compressor damage.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
ENGINE OVERHEATED
STOP ENGINE
This message displays when the
passenger side rear door is not
closed properly. Make sure that the
door is closed completely.
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine is overheating,
severe engine damage may
occur. If an overheat warning
appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑19 for more information.
ENGINE OVERHEATED
IDLE ENGINE
TRUNK OPEN
This message displays when the
trunk is not closed completely.
Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Trunk on
page 2‑10.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle
while the engine is overheating,
severe engine damage may
occur. If an overheat warning
appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Do not increase the engine speed
above normal idling speed.
This message displays along with a
continuous chime when the engine
has overheated. Stop and turn the
engine off immediately to avoid
severe engine damage. See Engine
Overheating on page 10‑19.
Engine Cooling System
Messages
ENGINE HOT A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑19 for more information.
SERVICE A/C
(Air Conditioning) SYSTEM
This message displays when the
engine coolant becomes hotter than
the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a
hot engine, the air conditioning
compressor is automatically turned
off. When the coolant temperature
returns to normal, the A/C operation
automatically resumes.
This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
This message displays when the
electronic sensors that control the
air conditioning and heating
systems are no longer working.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-31
Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer if you notice
a drop in heating and air
OIL PRESSURE LOW
STOP ENGINE
Engine Power Messages
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine oil pressure is
low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure
warning appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Do not drive the vehicle until the
cause of the low oil pressure is
corrected. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑8 for more information.
conditioning efficiency.
This message displays when the
vehicle's engine power is reduced.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be
reduced. Anytime this message
stays on, the vehicle should be
taken to your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
Engine Oil Messages
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when
service is required for the vehicle.
See your dealer. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑8 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more
information.
This message displays when the
vehicle's engine oil pressure is low.
The oil pressure light also appears
on the instrument panel cluster.
See Engine Oil Pressure Light on
page 5‑23.
Acknowledging the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will
not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING.
That must be done at the OIL LIFE
screen under the vehicle information
menu. See “Oil Life” under Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
Stop the vehicle immediately, as
engine damage can result from
driving a vehicle with low oil
pressure. Have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer as soon as possible
when this message is displayed.
page 5‑24 and Engine Oil Life
System on page 10‑10.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-32
Instruments and Controls
see “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.
This message displays and a chime
sounds only when the ignition is in
ON/RUN. The message will not
disappear until the turn signal is
manually turned off, or a turn is
completed.
Fuel System Messages
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays when your
vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel
tank as soon as possible. See Fuel
Gauge on page 5‑12 and Filling the
Tank on page 9‑38 for more
information.
Lamp Messages
AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL OFF
Ride Control System
Messages
This message displays when the
automatic headlamps are turned off.
See Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑2 for more information.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
SERVICE STABILITRAK
This message may be displayed if
the gas cap is not on, or is not fully
tightened. Check the gas cap to
ensure that it is on properly.
See Filling the Tank on page 9‑38
for more information.
If your vehicle has Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), this
AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL ON
message displays if there has been
a problem detected with ESC. The
ESC/TCS light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster. See
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
page 9‑31 for more information.
This message displays when the
automatic headlamps are turned on.
See Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑2 for more information.
Key and Lock Messages
If this message turns on while you
are driving, pull off the road as
soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning
the ignition off and then back on.
TURN SIGNAL ON
REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY
This message displays as a
reminder to turn off the turn signal
if you drive your vehicle for more
than about 1.2 km (0.75 mile) with
a turn signal on. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 6‑5.
This message displays when the
battery in the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to
be replaced. To replace the battery,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-33
.
The battery is low.
If this message still stays on or
turns back on again while you are
driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the system inspected by your
dealer as soon as possible.
driving the vehicle and exceeding
30 km/h (19 mph) for 30 seconds.
The ESC system is not functional
until the light has turned off. See
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
page 9‑31 for more information.
.
There is a TCS failure. See your
dealer for service.
TRACTION CONTROL ON
If your vehicle has the Traction
SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL
Control System (TCS), this message
displays when the TCS is turned on.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑29 for more information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
If your vehicle has the Traction
Control System (TCS), this
message displays when the
TCS turns off. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑29 for
more information.
If your vehicle has the Traction
Control System (TCS), this message
displays when the system is not
functioning properly. A warning light
also appears on the instrument
panel cluster. See Traction Control
System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 5‑21. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑29 for
more information. Have the TCS
serviced by your dealer as soon
as possible.
Airbag System Messages
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message may display when
the ignition is in ON/RUN and
disappears after 10 seconds, unless
it is acknowledged or an urgent
warning appears.
This message displays when there
is a problem with the airbag system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer immediately. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑15 for
more information.
Any of the following conditions may
cause the TCS to turn off:
STABILITRAK NOT READY
.
If your vehicle has Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), this
message may display and the
ESC/TCS light on the instrument
panel cluster may be on after first
The TCS is turned off by
pressing the traction control
button. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑29 for
more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-34
Instruments and Controls
STARTING DISABLED
SERVICE THROTTLE
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages
Service Vehicle Messages
ERROR
This message displays if the starting
of the engine is disabled due to the
electronic throttle control system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer immediately.
SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
This message displays while
viewing the odometer or trip
odometers if there is a problem
with the instrument panel cluster.
See your dealer for service.
This message displays when there
is a problem with the theft-deterrent
system programmed in the key.
A fault has been detected in the
system which means that the
system is disabled and it is not
protecting the vehicle. The vehicle
usually restarts; however, you may
want to take the vehicle to your
dealer before turning off the engine.
See Immobilizer Operation on
page 2‑13 for more information.
This message only appears while
the ignition is in ON/RUN, and
will not disappear until the problem
is resolved.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
This message displays when a
problem is detected with the power
steering system. When this
message is displayed, you may
notice that the effort required to
steer the vehicle increases or feels
heavier, but you will still be able to
steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer immediately.
This message cannot be
acknowledged.
Tire Messages
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
SYSTEM
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the
content theft-deterrent system has
detected a break-in attempt while
you were away from your vehicle.
See Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 2‑12 for more information.
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays if a part on the
TPMS is not working properly.
The tire pressure light also flashes
and then remains on during the
same ignition cycle. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 5‑22.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a
non-emissions related malfunction
occurs. Have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-35
Several conditions may cause this
message to appear. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 10‑47 for more information.
If the warning comes on and stays
on, there may be a problem with the
TPMS. See your dealer.
The DIC also shows the tire
pressure values. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑24.
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the
vehicle's tires is low. This message
also displays LEFT FRT (left front),
RIGHT FRT (right front), LEFT RR
(left rear), or RIGHT RR (right rear)
to indicate the location of the low
tire. The low tire pressure warning
light will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 5‑22. You
can receive more than one tire
pressure message at a time. To
read the other messages that may
have been sent at the same time,
press the set/reset button. If a tire
pressure message appears on the
DIC, stop as soon as you can.
Have the tire pressures checked
and set to those shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
See Tires on page 10‑38, Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12, and
Tire Pressure on page 10‑44.
Transmission Messages
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when there
is a problem with the transmission.
See your dealer for service.
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the TPMS
is re-learning the tire positions on
your vehicle. The tire positions must
be re-learned after rotating the tires
or after replacing a tire or sensor.
See Tire Inspection on page 10‑51,
Tire Rotation on page 10‑51, Tire
Pressure Monitor System on
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE
ENGINE
This message displays when the
transmission fluid in your vehicle is
too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it
to idle until it cools down. If the
warning message continues to
display, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer as soon as possible.
page 10‑46, and Tire Pressure on
page 10‑44 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-36
Instruments and Controls
The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.
Vehicle Reminder
Messages
Vehicle
Personalization
To change customization
preferences, use the following
procedure.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
WITH CARE
Your vehicle has customization
capabilities that allow you to
program certain features to one
preferred setting. Customization
features can only be programmed to
one setting on the vehicle and
cannot be programmed to a
preferred setting for two different
drivers.
This message displays when the
outside air temperature is cold
enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
Entering the Feature
Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place
the vehicle in P (Park).
To avoid excessive drain on the
battery, it is recommended that
the headlamps are turned off.
Washer Fluid Messages
All of the customization options may
not be available on your vehicle.
Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
WASHER FLUID LOW
ADD FLUID
2. Press the customization button
to enter the feature
This message displays when the
windshield washer fluid is low. Fill
the windshield washer reservoir as
soon as possible. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for the location of the
windshield washer reservoir. Also,
see Washer Fluid on page 10‑22 for
more information.
settings menu.
The default settings for the
If the menu is not available,
FEATURE SETTINGS
AVAILABLE IN PARK will
display. Before entering the
menu, make sure the vehicle is
in P (Park).
customization features were set
when your vehicle left the factory,
but may have been changed from
their default state since then.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-37
Press the customization button until
automatically unlock. See
Feature Settings Menu Items
the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen
appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access
the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
“Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock” under Automatic Door
Locks on page 2‑8 for more
information.
The following are customization
features that allow you to program
settings to the vehicle:
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
Press the customization button until
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
This feature will only display if a
language other than English has
been set. This feature allows you to
change the language in which the
DIC messages appear to English.
ENGLISH (default): All messages
will appear in English.
FRANCAIS: All messages will
appear in French.
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until
ESPANOL: All messages will
appear in Spanish.
OFF: None of the doors will
automatically unlock.
the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN
ENGLISH screen appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to display all DIC
messages in English.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the
driver door will unlock when the key
is taken out of the ignition.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver
door will unlock when the vehicle is
shifted into P (Park) .
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
This feature allows you to select
the language in which the DIC
messages will appear.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken
out of the ignition.
This feature allows you to select
whether or not to turn off the
automatic door unlocking feature.
It also allows you to select which
doors and when the doors will
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the
doors will unlock when the vehicle is
shifted into P (Park).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-38
Instruments and Controls
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
Press the customization button until
REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
through the following settings:
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
HORN & LIGHTS OFF: There will
be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
This feature allows you to select the
type of feedback you will receive
when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when locking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter if any of
the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3 for more
information.
This feature allows you to select the
type of feedback you will receive
when unlocking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when unlocking the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter if
the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3 for more
information.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound
on the second press of the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN & LIGHTS ON (default):
The exterior lamps will flash when
you press the lock button on the
RKE transmitter, and the horn will
sound when the lock button is
pressed again within five seconds of
the previous command.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-39
Press the customization button until
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears
on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the
settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
EXIT LIGHTING
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
This feature allows you to select
the amount of time you want the
exterior lamps to remain on when it
is dark enough outside. This
happens after the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
APPROACH LIGHTING
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps
will not flash when you press the
unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
Press the customization button until
EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the
This feature allows you to select
whether or not to have the exterior
lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle
using the Remote Keyless
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior
lamps will flash when you press
the unlock button on the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until
APPROACH LIGHTING appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
RKE transmitter.
OFF: The exterior lamps will not
turn on.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
30 SECONDS (default): The
exterior lamps will stay on for
30 seconds.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
through the following settings:
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will
stay on for one minute.
OFF: The exterior lights will not
turn on when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will
stay on for two minutes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-40
Instruments and Controls
ON (default): If it is dark enough
outside, the exterior lights will turn
on briefly when you unlock the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
CHIME VOLUME
REMOTE START
This feature allows you to select the
volume level of the chime.
If your vehicle has this feature, it
allows you to turn the remote start
off or on. The remote start feature
allows you to start the engine from
outside of the vehicle using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 2‑5 for more
Press the customization button until
CHIME VOLUME appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
The lights will remain on for
20 seconds or until the lock button
on the RKE transmitter is pressed,
or the vehicle is no longer off.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3 for
more information.
information.
Press the customization button until
REMOTE START appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will
be set to a normal level.
NO CHANGE : No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
LOUD: The chime volume will be
set to a loud level.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
OFF: The remote start feature will
be disabled.
There is no default for chime
volume. The volume will stay at the
last known setting.
ON (default): The remote start
feature will be enabled.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Exiting the Feature
5-41
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
DO NOT RESTORE: The
customization features will not be
Settings Menu
set to their factory default settings.
The feature settings menu will be
exited when any of the following
occurs:
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
FACTORY SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of
the customization features back to
their factory default settings.
.
The vehicle is shifted out of
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
P (Park).
.
Press the customization button until
FACTORY SETTINGS appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
This feature allows you to exit the
FEATURE SETTINGS menu.
The vehicle is no longer in
ON/RUN.
.
Press the customization button until
The trip/fuel or vehicle
information DIC buttons are
pressed.
FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V
TO EXIT appears in the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to
exit the menu.
.
The end of the feature settings
menu is reached and exited.
through the following settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The
customization features will be set to
their factory default settings.
.
If you do not exit, pressing the
customization button again will
return you to the beginning of the
FEATURE SETTINGS menu.
A 40-second time period has
elapsed with no selection made.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-42
Instruments and Controls
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
the lease ends. See “Erasing
Universal Home Remote Buttons” in
this section.
Universal Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑17 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Park the vehicle outside of the
garage when programming a garage
door. Be sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door
or gate that is being programmed.
Do not use this system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
Universal Remote System
Programming
For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go
to www.learcar2u.com.
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have
another person available to assist in
programming the transmitter.
Most garage door openers sold after
1996 are Rolling Code units.
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
Be sure to keep the original remote
control transmitter for use in other
vehicles, as well as for future
programming. Only the original
remote control transmitter is needed
for Fixed Code programming. The
programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
This vehicle may have the Universal
Home Remote System.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-43
3. Immediately return to the
vehicle. Press and hold the
Universal Home Remote button
that will be used to control the
garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light,
above the selected button,
should slowly blink. This button
may need to be held for up to
20 seconds.
4. Immediately, within one second,
release the button when the
garage door moves. The
To program up to three devices:
2. In the garage, locate the
garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit). Locate the
“Learn” or “Smart” button.
It can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit
and may be a colored button.
Press this button. After pressing
this button, complete the
following steps in less than
30 seconds.
indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
1. From inside the vehicle,
press the two outside buttons at
the same time for one to
two seconds, and immediately
release them.
5. Press and release the same
button again. The garage door
should move, confirming that
programming is successful and
complete.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-44
Instruments and Controls
To program another Rolling Code
device such as an additional garage
door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat
Steps 1 through 5, choosing a
different function button in
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
the garage door opener is a
Fixed Code unit. If you do not
see a row of dip switches, return
to the previous section for
Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Step 3 than what was used for
the garage door opener.
Your hand-held transmitter can
have between 8 to 12 dip
switches depending on the
brand of transmitter.
If these instructions do not work,
the garage door opener is probably
a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that
follow for a Fixed Code garage
door opener.
The garage door opener receiver
(motor head unit) could also
have a row of dip switches that
can be used when programming
the Universal Home Remote.
If the total number of switches
on the motor head and
hand-held transmitter is different,
or if the dip switch settings are
different, use the dip switch
settings on the motor head unit
to program the Universal Home
Remote. The motor head dip
switch settings can also be used
when the original hand held
transmitter is not available.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go
to www.learcar2u.com.
To program up to three devices:
1. To verify that the garage door
opener is a Fixed Code unit,
remove the battery cover on the
hand held transmitter supplied
by the manufacturer of the
Most garage door openers sold
before 1996 are Fixed Code units.
garage door opener motor.
If there are a row of dip switches
similar to the graphic above,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-45
The switch positions on the
hand-held transmitter could be
labeled, as follows:
2. Write down the 8 to 12 switch
settings from left to right as
follows:
.
.
A switch in the up position
When a switch is in the
could be labeled as
up position, write “Left.”
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
.
When a switch is in the
down position, write “Right.”
Example of Eight Dip Switches
with Two Positions
.
A switch in the down
position could be labeled as
“Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
.
If a switch is set between
the up and down position,
write “Middle.”
.
A switch in the middle
position could be labeled as
“Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
The switch settings written
down in Step 2 will now
become the button strokes
to be entered into the
Example of Eight Dip Switches
with Three Positions
Universal Home Remote in
Step 4. Be sure to enter the
switch settings written down
in Step 2, in order from left
to right, into the Universal
Home Remote, when
The panel of switches might not
appear exactly as they do in the
examples above, but they
should be similar.
completing Step 4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-46
Instruments and Controls
3. From inside your vehicle,
first firmly press all three buttons
at the same time for about
three seconds. Release the
buttons to put the Universal
Home Remote into
4. The indicator lights will blink
slowly. Enter each switch setting
from Step 2 into your vehicle's
Universal Home Remote.
6. Press and hold the button that
will be used to control the
garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light
above the selected button
should slowly blink. This button
may need to be held for up to
55 seconds.
You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete
Step 4. Now press one button on
the Universal Home Remote for
each switch setting as follows:
programming mode.
7. Immediately release the button
when the garage door moves.
The indicator light will blink
rapidly until programming is
complete.
.
If you wrote “Left,” press
the left button in the
vehicle.
.
If you wrote “Right,” press
the right button in the
vehicle.
8. Press and release the same
button again. The garage door
should move, confirming that
programming is successful and
complete.
.
If you wrote “Middle,” press
the middle button in the
vehicle.
To program another Fixed Code
device such as an additional garage
door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat
Steps 1 through 8, choosing a
different button in Step 6 than what
was used for the garage door
opener.
5. After entering all of the switch
positions, again, firmly press and
release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights
will turn on.
A. Left Button
("Up," "+," or "On.")
B. Middle Button
("Middle," "0," or "Neutral.")
C. Right Button
("Down," "-," or "Off.")
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-47
Erasing Universal Home
Remote Buttons
Universal Remote System
Operation
Press and hold the appropriate
button for at least half of a second.
The indicator light will come on
while the signal is being transmitted.
The programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends.
To erase either Rolling Code or
Fixed Code on the Universal Home
Remote device:
Reprogramming Universal
Home Remote Buttons
1. Press and hold the 2 outside
buttons at the same time for
approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located
directly above the buttons, begin
to blink rapidly.
Any of the three buttons can be
reprogrammed by repeating the
instructions.
2. Once the indicator lights begin
to blink, release both buttons.
The codes from all buttons will
be erased.
For help or information on the
Universal Home Remote System,
call the customer assistance phone
number under Customer Assistance
Offices on page 13‑4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-48
Instruments and Controls
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-1
Lighting Features
Lighting
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . 6-7
Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-2
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)/Automatic
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2
Lighting
It controls the following systems:
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically
turns on the headlamps at normal
brightness, together with the
following:
Exterior Lighting
.
Headlamps
.
Exterior Lamp Controls
Taillamps
.
.
Parking Lamps
Parking Lamps
.
.
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
.
.
Instrument Panel Lights
Taillamps
.
.
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
License Plate Lamps
The exterior lamps control has
four positions:
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on
the parking lamps together with
the following:
O (Off): Turns off the automatic
headlamps and daytime running
lamps (DRL). Turning the headlamp
control to the off position again will
turn the automatic headlamps or
DRL back on. For vehicles first sold
in Canada, the off position only
works when the vehicle is shifted
into the P (Park) position.
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
The exterior lamps control is located
on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
Flash-to-Pass
This feature is used to signal to the
vehicle ahead that you want
to pass.
6-3
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps together with the
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low
beam to high beam, push the turn
signal/multifunction lever away
from you.
following lamps listed below. When
the headlamps are turned on while
the vehicle is on, the headlamps will
turn off automatically 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned off. When
the headlamps are turned on while
the vehicle is off, the headlamps will
stay on for 10 minutes before
automatically turning off to
prevent the battery from being
drained. Turn the headlamp control
to off and then back to the
headlamp on position to make the
headlamps stay on for an additional
10 minutes.
If the headlamps are off or in the
low‐beam position, pull the turn
signal lever toward you to
This instrument panel cluster light
3 comes on if the high‐beam
lamps are turned on while the
ignition is in ON/RUN.
momentarily switch to high beams.
Release the lever to turn the
high-beam headlamps off.
To change the headlamps from high
beam to low beam, pull the turn
signal lever toward you.
.
Parking Lamps
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
# (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped):
Turns on the fog lamps.
See Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4
Lighting
When the DRL are on, the regular
headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,
and other lamps are not on. The
instrument panel and cluster are
also not on.
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)/Automatic
Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flashers let
you warn others that you have a
problem.
The hazard warning flasher button
is located on top of the steering
column.
The headlamps automatically
change from DRL to the regular
headlamps depending on the
darkness of the surroundings.
The other lamps that come on with
the headlamps will also come on.
| : Press to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and
off. Press the button again to turn
the flashers off.
The DRL system makes the
low-beam headlamps come on at a
reduced brightness when the
following conditions are met:
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps go off and the
DRL come on.
When the hazard warning flashers
are on, the turn signals will
not work.
.
The ignition is in the ON/RUN
The regular headlamp system
position.
should be turned on when needed.
.
The exterior lamps control is
in AUTO.
Do not cover the light sensor on top
of the instrument panel because it
works with the DRL.
.
The engine is running.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-5
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Hold it there until the lane
change is completed. If the lever is
briefly pressed and released, the
turn signal flashes three times.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
Fog Lamps
# (Fog Lamps): For vehicles with
fog lamps, the button is located on
the exterior lamps control. The
exterior lamps control is located on
the instrument panel to the left of
the steering column.
The lever returns to its starting
position whenever it is released.
The ignition must be in the
ON/RUN position for the fog lamps
to come on.
If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
might be burned out.
Press # to turn the fog lamps on or
off. A light will come on in the
instrument panel cluster.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 10‑34.
When the headlamps are changed
to high beam, the fog lamps also
go off.
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Turn Signal On Chime
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
If either one of the turn signals are
left on and the vehicle has been
driven more than 1.2 km (0.75 mile),
a chime will sound.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6
Lighting
The reading lamps, located on the
rearview mirror, can be turned on or
off independent of the automatic
courtesy lamps, when the doors
are closed.
Interior Lighting
Lighting Features
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): The knob with this
symbol on it is located next to the
exterior lamps control to the left of
the steering wheel. Push the knob in
all the way until it extends out and
then turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to brighten or dim
the lights. Push the knob back in
when finished.
Entry Lighting
For vehicles with courtesy lamps,
they come on and stay on for a set
time whenever the unlock symbol is
pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Dome Lamps
The center mounted dome lamp
overhead comes on when a door is
opened. This lamp can also be
turned on by turning the instrument
panel brightness control clockwise.
If a door is opened, the lamps stay
on while it is open and then turn off
automatically about 20 seconds
after the door is closed. If the unlock
symbol is pressed and no door is
opened, the lamps turn off after
about 20 seconds.
Reading Lamps
The vehicle has reading lamps that
also act as the dome lamp. Press
the button near each lamp to turn
them on and off.
Courtesy Lamps
When a door is opened, the
courtesy lamps automatically come
on. They make it easy for you to
enter and leave your vehicle. You
can also manually turn these lamps
on by fully turning the instrument
panel brightness control clockwise.
Entry lighting includes a feature
called theater dimming. With theater
dimming, the lamps do not turn off
at the end of the delay time.
Instead, they slowly dim and then
go out. The delay time is canceled if
the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN
or the power door lock switch is
pressed. The lamps will dim
right away.
Map Lamps
The vehicle has map lamps on the
rearview mirror. Press the button
near each lamp on the mirror to turn
the map lamps on and off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
Parade Dimming
Parade mode automatically prohibits
the dimming of the instrument panel
displays during the daylight while
the headlamps are on so that the
displays are still able to be seen.
6-7
When the ignition is on, illuminated
entry is inactive, which means the
courtesy lamps will not come on
unless a door is opened.
Delayed Exit Lighting
This feature illuminates the interior
for a period of time after the key is
removed from the ignition.
Delayed Entry Lighting
Delayed entry lighting illuminates
the interior for a period of time after
all the doors have been closed.
The ignition must be off for delayed
exit lighting to work. When the key
is removed, interior illumination
activates and remains on until one
of the following occurs:
Battery Load
Management
The vehicle has Electric Power
Management (EPM) that estimates
the battery's temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
for best performance and extended
life of the battery.
The ignition must be off for delayed
entry lighting to work. Immediately
after all the doors have been closed,
the delayed entry lighting feature
continues to work until one of the
following occurs:
.
The ignition is in ON/RUN.
.
The power door locks are
activated.
.
An illumination period of
20 seconds has elapsed.
.
The ignition is in ON/RUN.
If during the illumination period a
door is opened, the timed
illumination period will be canceled
and the interior lamps will remain on
because a door is open.
When the battery's state of
.
The doors are locked.
charge is low, the voltage is raised
slightly to quickly bring the charge
back up. When the state of charge
is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging.
.
An illumination period of about
25 seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period a
door is opened, the timed
illumination period is canceled and
the interior lamps remain on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8
Lighting
If the vehicle has a voltmeter gauge
or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may
see the voltage move up or down.
This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs.
It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.
Battery Power Protection
This feature helps prevent the
battery from being drained, if the
interior courtesy lamps, reading/map
lamps, visor vanity lamps, or trunk
lamp are accidentally left on. If any
of these lamps are left on, they
automatically turn off after
10 minutes, if the ignition is off.
The lamps will not come back
on again until one of the
The battery can be discharged at
idle if the electrical loads are very
high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator
(alternator) may not be spinning fast
enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high
electrical loads.
Normally, these actions occur in
steps or levels, without being
noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action,
this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information
Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE. If this messages
displays, it is recommended that the
driver reduce the electrical loads as
much as possible. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
following occurs:
.
The ignition is turned on.
.
The exterior lamps control is
A high electrical load occurs when
several of the following are on, such
as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger,
climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans,
trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
turned off, then on again.
The headlamps will time out after
10 minutes, if they are manually
turned on with the ignition on or off.
page 5‑24.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-1
For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 9‑2.
Introduction
Determine which radio the vehicle
has and read the following pages to
become familiar with its features.
Infotainment
System
Notice: Contact your dealer
before adding any equipment.
Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
the operation of the vehicle's
engine, radio, or other systems,
and could damage them. Follow
federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone equipment.
Introduction
WARNING
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
{
Taking your eyes off the road for
extended periods could cause a
crash resulting in injury or death
to you or others. Do not give
extended attention to
Radio
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-13
The vehicle has Retained
entertainment tasks while driving.
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑18 for more
information.
This system provides access to
many audio and non-audio listings.
Audio Players
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
Phone
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
.
TheftLock® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it is
stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
.
Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2
Infotainment System
Operation
Radio with CD (Base)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
Using the Radio
7-3
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
4 (Information): Press to switch
the display between the radio
station frequency and the time.
While the ignition is off, press this
button to display the time.
Speed Compensated
Volume (SCV): Radios with the
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV)
feature automatically adjust the
radio volume to compensate for
road and wind noise as the vehicle
speeds up or slows down, so that
the volume level is consistent.
Radio with CD (MP3)
To activate SCV:
The vehicle has one of these radios
as its infotainment system.
Softkeys
1. Set the radio volume to the
desired level.
The Radio with CD (MP3) has
six softkeys located below the radio
display. Softkeys are used to control
functions that appear on the radio
display as tabs directly above the
softkeys.
2. Press MENU to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the softkey under the
AUTO VOLUM tab on the
radio display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-4
Infotainment System
4. Press the softkey under the
desired Speed Compensated
Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of
radio volume compensation.
The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each
higher setting allows for more
radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
EQ (Equalization): Press this
button to choose bass and treble
equalization settings designed for
different types of music. Selecting
MANUAL or changing bass or
treble, returns the EQ to the manual
bass and treble settings.
3. Adjust the setting by doing one
of the following:
.
Turn the f knob clockwise
or counterclockwise.
.
Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.
.
Press \ FWD or s REV.
Unique EQ settings can be saved
for each source.
If a station's frequency is weak or if
there is static, decrease the treble.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
Radio with CD (MP3)
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Radio with CD
To quickly adjust bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position,
press the softkey positioned under
the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for
more than two seconds. A beep
sounds and the level adjusts to the
middle position.
To adjust the bass or treble:
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
or Treble): To adjust the bass,
midrange, or treble:
1. Press the f knob until Bass or
Treble displays.
2. To adjust the setting, do one of
the following:
1. Press the f knob until the tone
control tabs display.
To quickly adjust all tone and
speaker controls to the middle
.
2. Highlight the desired tone
control tab by doing one of the
following:
Turn the f knob.
position, press the f knob for
more than two seconds until a
beep sounds.
.
Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.
.
.
Press \ FWD or s REV.
Press the f knob.
.
Press the softkey under the
desired tab.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-5
EQ (Equalization): Press this
button to choose bass and treble
equalization settings designed for
different types of music. Selecting
MANUAL or changing bass or treble
returns the EQ to the manual bass
and treble settings.
To quickly adjust all speaker and
tone controls to the middle position,
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade) Radio with
CD (MP3)
press the f knob for more than
two seconds.
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To
adjust the balance or fade:
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is
turned on, the radio disables FADE
and mutes the rear speakers.
1. Press the f knob until the
Unique EQ settings can be saved
for each source.
If the radio has a Bose® audio
system, the EQ settings are either
MANUAL or TALK.
speaker control tabs display.
Radio Messages
2. Highlight the desired speaker
control tab by doing one of
the following:
Calibration Error: Displays if
the radio is no longer calibrated
properly for the vehicle. The vehicle
must be returned to your dealer
for service.
.
Press the f knob.
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade) Radio with CD
.
Press the softkey under the
desired tab.
Loc or Locked: Displays when the
THEFTLOCK system has activated.
Take the vehicle to your dealer
for service.
To adjust the balance or fade:
3. Adjust the setting by doing one
of the following:
1. Press the ` button or press the
f knob until the speaker control
label displays.
.
Turn the f knob clockwise
or counterclockwise.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if
an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer.
2. To adjust the setting, do one of
the following:
.
Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.
.
Press \ FWD or s REV.
.
Turn the f knob.
.
Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.
.
Press \ FWD or s REV.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-6
Infotainment System
display and artist information
displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, “NO
INFO” displays.
Finding a Station
Radio
BAND: Press to choose
between FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM™ (if equipped) on the Radio
with CD (Base). Press to choose
between FM, AM, XM (if equipped)
on the Radio with CD (MP3).
AM-FM Radio
Radio Data System (RDS)
Auto Text (RDS Features): If
additional information is available
for the current song being played,
Auto Text will automatically page/
scroll the information every
three seconds above the FAV
presets on the radio display. By
default, Auto Text is enabled.
The radio may have RDS. The RDS
feature is available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from
these stations and only works when
the information is available. While
the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS
station, the station name or call
letters display. In rare cases, a radio
station could broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio
features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio
stations.
© SEEK: Press to seek or scan
stations with a strong signal in the
selected band.
To change the Auto Text setting:
.
To seek stations, press and
1. Press MENU to display the radio
setup menu.
release © SEEK to go to the
previous station and stay there.
2. Press the softkey under AUTO
TXT tab on the radio display.
.
To scan stations, press and hold
© SEEK for a few seconds until
the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the
3. Press the softkey under the ON
or OFF tab on the radio display.
4 (Information) (RDS Features):
For vehicles with RDS features,
If 4 is pressed and the song title
or artist information is longer than
what can be displayed, the extra
information will page every
three seconds when Auto Text is
activated.
press 4 to display additional text
information related to the current
FM-RDS station. If information is
available, the song title information
displays on the top line of the
next station. Press © SEEK
again to stop scanning.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-7
.
To scan preset stations in the
selected band, press and hold
© SEEK for four seconds until a
double beep sounds. The radio
goes to a stored preset, plays
for a few seconds, then goes
to the next stored preset. Press
© SEEK again to stop scanning
preset stations.
The radio goes to a stored
preset, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next stored
Radios that do not have a
FAV button store radio stations
as presets, up to 18 stations
(6 FM1, 6 FM2, and 6 AM), can be
programmed on the 6 numbered
pushbuttons.
preset. Press ¨ SEEK again to
stop scanning preset stations.
Storing Radio Stations
Storing a Radio Station as a
Preset, Radio with CD (Base)
Drivers are encouraged to store
radio station while the vehicle is
parked, See Defensive Driving on
page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio
stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls,
if the vehicle has this feature.
Radios that have numbered
pushbuttons store radio stations
as presets.
¨ SEEK: Press to seek or scan
stations with a strong signal in the
selected band.
.
Up to 18 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2,
and 6 AM), can be programmed on
the six numbered buttons.
To seek stations, press and
release ¨ SEEK to go to the
next station and stay there.
Radios that have a FAV button store
radio stations as favorites, up to
36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the 6 softkeys below
the radio station frequency tabs and
by using the FAV button. Press the
FAV button to go through up to
6 pages of favorites, each having
6 favorite stations available per
page. Each page of favorites can
contain any combination of AM, FM,
or XM, if equipped, stations.
To store preset stations:
.
To scan stations, press and hold
1. Tune to a radio station.
¨ SEEK for a few seconds until
the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the
2. Press and hold one of the
6 numbered pushbuttons for
3 seconds until a beep sounds.
next station. Press ¨ SEEK
again to stop scanning.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to store
additional radio stations.
.
To scan preset stations in the
selected band, press and
hold ¨ SEEK for four seconds
until a double beep sounds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-8
Infotainment System
Storing a Radio Station as a
Favorite, Radio with CD (MP3)
4. Press the FAV button, or let the
menu time out, to return to the
original main radio screen
showing the radio station
frequency tabs and to begin the
process of programming
favorites.
4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio
Service): For vehicles with XM,
Radios that have a FAV button store
radio stations as favorites.
press 4 to display additional text
information related to the current
XM channel. If information is
available, the song title information
displays on the top line of the
display and artist information
displays on the bottom line.
When information is not available,
“NO INFO” displays.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to a radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display
the page where the station will
be stored.
Satellite Radio
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
3. Press and hold one of the
6 softkeys until a beep sounds.
XM is a satellite radio service that is
based in the 48 contiguous United
States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide
variety of programming and
Auto Text (Satellite Radio
Service): If additional information is
available for the current song being
played, Auto Text will automatically
page/scroll the information every
three seconds above the FAV
presets on the radio display. By
default, Auto Text is enabled.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to
store additional radio stations.
The number of favorites pages can
be set up using the MENU button.
To set up the number of favorites
pages:
commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
sound. A service fee is required to
receive the XM service. If XM
Service needs to be reactivated, the
radio will display “No Subscription
Please Renew” on channel XM1.
For more information, contact XM at
www.xmradio.com or call
To change the Auto Text setting:
1. Press the MENU button.
1. Press MENU to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below
the FAV 1-6 tab.
2. Press the softkey under AUTO
TXT tab on the radio display.
3. Select the number of favorites
pages by pressing the softkey
located below the displayed
page numbers.
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-9
3. Press the softkey under the ON
or OFF tab on the radio display.
2. Press either of the two softkeys
below the desired category tab
to immediately tune to the first
XM station in that category.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
XM channel.
.
If 4 is pressed and the song title or
artist information is longer than
what can be displayed, the extra
information will page every
three seconds when Auto Text is
activated.
To scan stations, press and hold
¨ SEEK for a few seconds until
the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few
seconds, then goes to the next
To go to the previous or next XM
station in the selected category,
do one of the following:
.
station. Press ¨ SEEK again to
stop scanning.
Turn the f knob.
.
Finding an XM Channel
Press the softkey below the
s REV: Press to go to the
right or left arrows in the
category tab.
BAND: Press to switch between
AM, FM, or XM, if equipped.
previous XM category.
\ FWD: Press to go to the next
.
Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK.
f (Tune): Turn to manually select
XM category.
an XM channel.
3. To exit the category search
mode, press the FAV button or
BAND button to display the
favorites again.
Finding a Category (CAT)
Channel
© SEEK: Press to go to the
previous XM channel.
.
To find XM channels in a category:
To scan stations, press and hold
© SEEK for a few seconds until
the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a cahnnel, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the
1. Press the CAT button to display
the category tabs. Continue
pressing the CAT button until the
desired category name displays.
next station. Press © SEEK
again to stop scanning.
.
Radios with CD and DVD
can also navigate the
category list by pressing the
\ FWD or the s REV
button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-10
Infotainment System
Adding and Removing Categories
3. Press and hold one of the
6 softkeys until a beep sounds.
Storing XM Channels
Categories cannot be added or
removed while the vehicle is moving
faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Drivers are encouraged to store
radio station while the vehicle is
parked. See Defensive Driving on
page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio
stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls,
if the vehicle has this feature.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to
store additional radio stations.
To add or remove a category:
1. Press the MENU button.
The number of favorites pages can
be set up using the MENU button.
To setup the number of favorites
pages:
2. Press the softkey located below
the XM CAT tab.
Up to 36 stations can be
1. Press the MENU button.
programmed as favorites using the
6 softkeys below the radio station
frequency tabs and by using the
FAV button. Press the FAV button to
go through up to 6 pages of
favorites, each having 6 favorite
stations available per page. Each
page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM,
if equipped, stations.
3. Turn the f knob to display the
category you want to add or
remove.
2. Press the softkey located below
the FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the number of favorites
pages by pressing the softkey
located below the displayed
page numbers.
4. Press the softkey located under
the Add or Remove tab.
To restore all removed
categories, press the softkey
under the Restore All tab.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the
menu time out, to return to the
original main radio screen
showing the radio station
frequency tabs and to begin the
process of programming
favorites.
5. Repeat the steps to remove
more categories.
Storing an XM Channel as a
Favorite
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to an XM channel.
2. Press the FAV button to display
the page where the station will
be stored.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-11
Channel Unauth : This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with
your XM subscription package.
No Subscription Please Renew:
XM subscription needs to be
reactivated. Contact XM at
xmradio.com or call
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language
Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a
customer's request, by calling
1-800-929-2100.
Channel Unavail: This previously
assigned channel is no longer
assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for
that preset button.
1-800-929-2100.
CAT Not Found: There are no
channels available for the selected
category. The system is working
properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code
in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process
should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No Artist Info: No artist
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver
in the vehicle could have previously
been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be
swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having
the vehicle serviced, check with
your dealer.
No XM Signal: The system is
functioning correctly, but the vehicle
is in a location that is blocking the
XM signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal
should return.
No Title Info: No song title
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message alternates with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate
the service.
No CAT Info: No category
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
Loading XM: The audio system is
acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly.
No Information: No text or
informational messages are
available at this time on this
channel. The system is working
properly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-12
Infotainment System
Check Antenna: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver or antenna
could have a fault. Consult with
your dealer.
AM
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere
with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
digital radio reception from coast to
coast in the 48 contiguous United
States, and in Canada. Just as
with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and
out. In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
Check XM Receivr: If this
message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver
could have a fault. Consult with
your dealer.
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time.
XM Not Available: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause
interference with the vehicle's radio.
This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls,
charging the phone's battery,
or simply having the phone on.
This interference causes an
increased level of static while
listening to the radio. If static is
received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn
it off.
FM Stereo
Radio Reception
FM signals only reach about
16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles).
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there
is interference or static, unplug
the item from the accessory
power outlet.
Although the radio has a built-in
electronic circuit that automatically
works to reduce interference, some
static can occur, especially around
tall buildings or hills, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-13
Notice: Using a razor blade or
sharp object to clear the inside
rear window can damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear
window defogger. Repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not clear the inside
rear window with sharp objects.
Backglass Antenna
Satellite Radio Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated
with the rear window defogger,
located in the rear window. Make
sure that the inside surface of the
rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not
damaged. If the inside surface is
damaged, it could interfere with
radio reception. For proper radio
reception, the antenna connector
needs to be properly attached to the
post on the glass.
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is
located on the roof of the vehicle.
Keep the antenna clear of
obstructions for clear radio
reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the
performance of the XM system may
be affected if the sunroof is open.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket
glass tinting with metallic film.
The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or
distort the incoming radio
reception. Any damage caused to
your backglass antenna due to
metallic tinting materials will
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
If a cellular telephone antenna
needs to be attached to the glass,
make sure that the grid lines for the
AM-FM antenna are not damaged.
There is enough space between
the grid lines to attach a cellular
telephone antenna without
interfering with radio reception.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-14
Infotainment System
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
Inserting a Disc
Audio Players
Insert the disc partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls it in
and the disc begins playing.
CD Player
Some CD players can play MP3
CD-R or CD-RW discs. See “MP3”
later in this section for more
information.
Use an adapter ring when playing
the smaller 8 cm (3 in) discs.
Smaller discs with the adapter ring
are loaded the same way as a
full-size disc.
If an error displays, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
The CD player can play the smaller
8 cm (3 in) single discs with an
adapter ring.
Care of CDs
Ejecting a Disc
Store a disc in its original case
or a protective case and away from
direct sunlight and dust. If the
bottom of a disc is damaged it may
not play properly or at all. Do not
touch the bottom of a disc while
handling it, pick it up by grasping
the outer edges or the edge of the
hole and the outer edge.
Z EJECT: Press to eject the disc.
If the disc is not removed after
several seconds, the CD player
automatically pulls the disc back in.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add labels to a disc. It could
get caught in the CD player. Use a
marking pen to write on the top of
the disc if a description is needed.
Playing a CD
Do not use CD lens cleaners.
They could damage the CD player.
When a CD is inserted into the
player, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the
track number displays.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
If the surface of a disc is dirty, take
a soft, lint‐free cloth or dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water,
and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
If the ignition or radio is turned off
when a CD is in the player, the CD
stays in the player. If the ignition or
radio is turned on when a CD is in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-15
the player, the CD starts to play
where it stopped, if it was the last
selected audio source.
Softkeys
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume and the
elapsed time of the track displays.
Release to resume playing the
track.
The six softkeys below the radio
display are used to control functions
that display as tabs.
Buttons and Knobs
The softkeys below the radio display
control the following features.
The buttons and knobs on the radio
control the following features.
RDM (Random): Tracks can be
listened to in random, rather than
sequential order.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
4 (Information): Press to display
available additional information
about the current track.
the CD.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start
of the current track, if more than
10 seconds have played. Press
and hold or press multiple times to
continue moving backward through
the tracks on the CD.
To use random:
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
while a CD is playing. The CD
remains inside the CD player.
1. Press the softkey below the
RDM tab until Random Current
Disc displays.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
play a CD while listening to the
radio or a portable audio device.
Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for
an auxiliary input device, such as a
portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, No
Aux Input Device Found may
display.
2. Press the softkey again to turn
off random play.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
track. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving
forward through the tracks on
the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
to reverse playback quickly within a
track. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the
track displays. Release to resume
playing the track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-16
Infotainment System
Root Directory
Playlists
MP3 Supported Files
The root directory is treated as a
folder. Files are stored in the root
directory when the disc or storage
device does not contain folders.
Files accessed from the root
directory of a disc display as
F1 ROOT.
Discs that have playlists that
The Radio with CD (MP3) has the
capability of playing an MP3 CD-R
or CD-RW disc.
were created using WinAmp™,
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed; however,
there is no playlist editing capability
using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
The radio can also play discs
that contain both uncompressed
CD audio and MP3 files. When a
disc contains both types of audio,
the CD player reads all MP3 files
first, then the uncompressed
CD audio files.
Empty Folder
Playing an MP3
Order of Play
Folders that do not contain files are
skipped, and the player advances to
the next folder that contains files.
Supported File and Folder
Structure
Tracks are played in the following
order:
File Naming
The radio supports:
.
The song name that displays is the
song name that is contained in the
ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio displays the file name without
the file extension as the track name.
Play begins from the first track in
.
Up to 50 folders.
the first playlist and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last
track of the last playlist has
played, play continues from the
first track of the first playlist.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
Up to 50 playlists.
.
Up to 255 files.
.
Track names longer than
Playlists with an .m3u or
.wpl extension.
.
32 characters or 4 pages are
shortened. The display does not
show parts of words on the last
page of text and the extension of
the filename is not displayed.
Play begins from the first track in
the first folder and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track
.
Files with an .mp3 or
.cda file extension.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-17
of the last folder has played,
play continues from the
first track of the first folder.
the elapsed time of the track
Softkeys
displays. Release s REV to
resume playing.
The six softkeys below the radio
display are used to control functions
that display as tabs.
When playback starts from a new
folder, the new track name displays
unless folder mode has been
chosen as the default display, then
the new folder name displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the
The softkeys below the radio display
control the following features.
S c (Previous Folder): Press
the softkey below S c to go to the
first track in the previous folder.
track displays. Release \ FWD to
resume playing.
Buttons and Knobs
The buttons and knobs on the radio
control the following features.
4 (Information): Press to display
available additional information
about the current track.
c T (Next Folder): Press the
softkey below c T to go to the
first track in the next folder.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files
on the disc.
BAND: Press to listen to the
radio while an MP3 disc is playing.
The MP3 disc remains inside the
CD player.
RDM (Random): MP3 files can be
listened to on a CD in random,
rather than sequential order.
To use random:
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the track, if more than 10 seconds
have played. Press and hold or
press multiple times to continue
moving backward through tracks.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
play an MP3 disc while listening to
the radio or a portable audio device.
Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for
an auxiliary input device, such as a
portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected,
No Aux Input Device Found may
display.
1. Press the softkey under the
RDM tab until Random Current
Disc displays to play songs from
the current CD in random order.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
track. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving
forward through tracks.
2. Press the same softkey again to
turn off random play.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
to reverse playback quickly. Sound
is heard at a reduced volume and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-18
Infotainment System
To change from playback by artist to
playback by album:
CD Player Messages
h (Music Navigator): Press the
softkey below h to have the files
played in order by artist or album.
The player scans the disc to sort the
files by artist and album ID3 tag
information. It can take several
minutes to scan the disc depending
on the number of files on the disc.
The radio may begin playing while it
is scanning in the background.
CHECK DISC: If an error message
displays and/or the disc comes out,
it could be for one of the following
reasons:
1. Press the softkey located below
the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below
the Album tab from the sort
screen.
.
The CD player is very hot. When
the temperature returns to
normal, the disc should play.
3. Press the softkey below the
Back tab to return to the main
music navigator screen.
.
The road is very rough. When
the road becomes smoother, the
disc should play.
When the scan is finished, the disc
begins playing files in order by
The album name displays on the
second line between the arrows
and songs from the current album
begins to play. Once all songs
from that album have played, the
player moves to the next album in
alphabetical order on the disc and
begins playing MP3 files from
that album.
.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
artist. The current artist playing is
shown on the second line of the
display. Once all songs by that artist
are played, the player moves to the
next artist in alphabetical order and
begins playing files by that artist.
or upside down.
To listen to files by another artist,
press the softkey located below
either arrow tab. The disc goes to
the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either softkey below the
arrow tab until the desired artist
displays.
To exit music navigator mode, press
the softkey below the Back tab to
return to normal MP3 playback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-19
.
.
.
The air is very humid. If so, wait
about an hour and try again.
Auxiliary Devices
O (Power/Volume): Turn to
increase or decrease the volume
of the portable player. Additional
volume adjustments might need to
be made from the portable device.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
A problem occurred while
burning the disc.
The radio system has an auxiliary
input jack located on the lower right
side of the faceplate. This is not an
audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. However, an
external audio device such as an
iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,
CD changer, or cassette tape player
can be connected to the auxiliary
input jack as another source for
audio listening.
The label is caught in the
CD player.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
while a portable audio device is
playing. The portable audio device
continues playing until it is stopped
or turned off.
If the disc is not playing correctly
for any other reason, try a known
good disc.
If any error occurs repeatedly
or if an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message,
write it down and provide it
to your dealer when reporting
the problem.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
play a CD while a portable audio
device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio
from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, No Aux Input Device
Found may display.
Drivers are encouraged to set up
any auxiliary device while the
vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive
Driving on page 9‑2 for more
information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player,
connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
While a device is connected, press
the radio CD/AUX button to begin
playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-20
Infotainment System
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
a minimum. The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
Bluetooth Controls
Phone
Use the buttons located on the
steering wheel to operate the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑3 for more information.
Bluetooth
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
can use a Bluetooth‐capable cell
phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to
make and receive phone calls.
The system can be used while the
key is in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY position. The range of
the Bluetooth system can be up to
9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones support
all functions, and not all phones are
guaranteed to work with the
When to Speak: A short tone
sounds after the system responds
indicating when it is waiting for a
voice command. Wait until the tone
and then speak.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to
answer incoming calls, confirm
system information, and start
speech recognition.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to
end a call, reject a call, or cancel an
operation.
Audio System
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth
system, sound comes through the
vehicle's front audio system
Pairing
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
information on compatible phones.
A Bluetooth cell phone must be
paired to the Bluetooth system and
then connected to the vehicle before
it can be used. See your cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for
Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made
using OnStar Hands‐Free Calling,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
Owner's Guide for more information.
speakers and overrides the audio
system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to
change the volume level. The
adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. To prevent
missed calls, a minimum volume
level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice
recognition to interpret voice
commands to dial phone numbers
and name tags.
For additional information, say
“Help” while you are in a voice
recognition menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-21
Pairing Information
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
.
Up to five cell phones can be
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
with instructions and a four‐digit
Personal Identification Number
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
paired to the Bluetooth system.
The system can list all cell phones
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
also connected to the vehicle, the
system responds with “is connected”
after that phone name.
.
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
4. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone that you want to pair.
For help with this process, see
your cell phone manufacturer's
user guide.
.
Pairing only needs to be
completed once, unless the
pairing information on the cell
phone changes or the cell phone
is deleted from the system.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “List.”
5. Locate the device named “Your
Vehicle” in the list on the cell
phone. Follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the
PIN that was provided in Step 3.
After the PIN is successfully
.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
Deleting a Paired Phone
.
If the phone name you want to
delete is unknown, see “Listing All
Paired and Connected Phones.”
If multiple paired cell phones are
within range of the system, the
system connects to the first
available paired cell phone in the
order that they were first paired
to the system. To connect to a
different paired phone, see
“Connecting to a Different
entered, the system prompts you
to provide a name for the paired
cell phone. This name will be
used to indicate which phones
are paired and connected to the
vehicle. See “Listing All Paired
and Connected Phones” later in
this section for more information.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
Phone” later in this section.
which phone to delete.
Pairing a Phone
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
additional phones.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-22
Infotainment System
Connecting to a Different Phone
Using the “Store” Command
Storing and Deleting Phone
Numbers
To connect to a different cell phone,
the Bluetooth system looks for the
next available cell phone in the
order in which all the available cell
phones were paired. Depending on
which cell phone you want to
1. Press and hold b g for
The system can store up to
30 phone numbers as name tags
in the Hands‐Free Directory that is
shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
two seconds.
2. Say “Store.”
3. Say the phone number or group
of numbers you want to store all
at once with no pauses, then
follow the directions given by the
system to save a name tag for
this number.
connect to, you may have to use
this command several times.
The following commands are used
to delete and store phone numbers.
1. Press and hold b g for
Store: This command will store a
phone number, or a group of
numbers as a name tag.
two seconds.
Using the “Digit Store” Command
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
Digit Store: This command allows
a phone number to be stored as a
name tag by entering the digits one
at a time.
3. Say “Change phone.”
.
If another cell phone is
found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now
connected.”
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time.
Delete: This command is used to
delete individual name tags.
.
If another cell phone is not
Delete All Name Tags: This
command deletes all stored name
tags in the Hands‐Free Calling
Directory and the OnStar
found, the original phone
remains connected.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
2. Say “Digit Store.”
Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
Making a Call
7-23
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to store. After
Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Command
Calls can be made using the
following commands.
each digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the last
digit has been entered, say
“Store,” and then follow the
directions given by the system to
save a name tag for this number.
This command deletes all stored
name tags in the Hands‐Free
Calling Directory and the OnStar
Dial or Call: The dial or call
command can be used
interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag.
Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory.
To delete all name tags:
Digit Dial: This command allows a
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
1. Press and hold b g for
Using the “Delete” Command
two seconds.
2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
1. Press and hold b g for
Re‐dial : This command is used to
dial the last number used on the cell
phone.
two seconds.
Listing Stored Numbers
2. Say “Delete.”
The list command will list all stored
numbers and name tags.
3. Say the name tag you want
to delete.
Using the “Dial” or “Call”
Command
Using the “List” Command
1. Press and hold b g for
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
two seconds.
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
2. Say “Directory.”
3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”
4. Say “List.”
3. Say the entire number without
pausing, or say the name tag.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-24
Infotainment System
Using the “Digit Dial” Command
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Call Waiting
The digit dial command allows a
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
After each digit is entered, the
system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
Call waiting must be supported on
the cell phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier.
Using the “Re‐dial” Command
.
Press b g to answer an
incoming call when another call
is active. The original call is
placed on hold.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
.
Press b g again to return to the
original call.
.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time.
To ignore the incoming call, no
action is required.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a
ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
.
Press c x to disconnect the
current call and switch to the call
on hold.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
.
Press b g to answer the call.
2. Say “Digit Dial.”
.
Press c x to ignore a call.
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to dial. After each
digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the
last digit has been entered,
say “Dial.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-25
Transferring Audio from the
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
Three‐Way Calling
Muting a Call
Three‐way calling must be
supported on the cell phone and
enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
During a call with the audio in the
vehicle:
1. Press b g.
2. Say “Transfer Call.”
.
1. While on a call, press b g.
2. Say “Three‐way call.”
To mute a call, press b g, and
then say “Mute call.”
Transferring Audio to the
Bluetooth System from a
Cell Phone
.
To cancel mute, press b g, and
3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
to be called.
then say “Un‐mute call.”
During a call with the audio on the
Transferring a Call
4. Once the call is connected,
cell phone, press b g. The audio
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
does not transfer to the vehicle,
use the audio transfer feature on the
cell phone. See your cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for
more information.
Audio can be transferred between
the Bluetooth system and the
cell phone.
press b g to link all callers
together.
Ending a Call
The cell phone must be paired and
connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Press c x to end a call.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-26
Infotainment System
Voice Pass-Thru
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
Clearing the System
Voice pass‐thru allows access to
the voice recognition commands on
the cell phone. See your cell phone
manufacturer's user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
Unless information is deleted out of
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the
phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
previous section “Deleting a Paired
Phone” and the previous sections
on deleting name tags.
The Bluetooth system can send
numbers and the numbers stored as
name tags during a call. You can
use this feature when calling a
menu‐driven phone system.
Account numbers can also be
stored for use.
To access contacts stored in the
cell phone:
1. Press and hold b g for
Sending a Number or Name Tag
During a Call
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system
responds “Bluetooth ready,”
followed by a tone.
Other Information
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
3. Say “Voice.” The system
responds “OK, accessing
<phone name>.”
2. Say “Dial.”
3. Say the number or name tag
to send.
The cell phone's normal prompt
messages will go through their cycle
according to the phone's operating
instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-1
Climate Control Systems
Climate Controls
This vehicle may have a dual or single climate control system. The heating,
cooling, defrost, defog and ventilation can be controlled with this system.
For vehicles with heated seats, see Heated Front Seats on page 3‑7.
Climate Control Systems
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls
A. Fan Control
F. Driver and Passenger
Heated Seats
B. Outside Air
G. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
C. Recirculation
D. Air Delivery Mode Control
E. Air Conditioning
H. Rear Window Defogger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2
Climate Controls
Temperature Control: For dual
zone, turn the thumbwheels up or
down to increase or decrease the
temperature on the driver or the
passenger side of the vehicle. For
single zone, turn the knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the temperature.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Positioning
the knob between two modes can
select a combination of those
modes.
Single Zone
E. Air Delivery Mode Control
A. Fan Control
If the airflow seems low when the
fan is at the highest setting, the
passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. There will
be some airflow noticeable from the
various outlets when driving, even
with the fan in the off position. For
more information, see Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 8‑6
and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2.
B. Outside Air
F. Air Conditioning
C. Temperature Control
D. Recirculation
G. Rear Window Defogger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-3
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
change the direction of the airflow
inside the vehicle.
it takes for the vehicle to cool down.
It also helps the system to operate
more efficiently.
0 (Defrost): This mode clears
the windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield with some air to the side
window vents and the floor vents.
When defrost is selected, the
system automatically forces outside
air into the vehicle. The air
conditioning compressor will run
automatically in this setting, unless
the outside temperature is below
4°C (40°F).
For quick cool down on hot days, do
the following:
To change the current mode, select
one of the following:
1. Select the H mode.
2. Press the # button.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets.
3. Select the coolest temperature
for both zones.
4. Select the highest 9 speed.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to
turn the air conditioning system on
or off. An indicator light comes
on to show that it is on. The air
conditioning can be selected in any
mode as long as the fan is on and
the outside temperature is above
freezing. A flashing indicator light
indicates that the air conditioning
compressor is currently not
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets, with some of the air
directed to the windshield and side
window outlets. In this mode, the
system automatically selects
outside air.
5. When the coolest temperature is
selected in the A/C mode, the
system automatically goes into
the recirculation mode to
improve cooling.
Using these settings together for
long periods of time may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening,
after the air inside the vehicle has
cooled, turn the recirculation
mode off.
- (Defog): This mode clears the
windshield of fog or moisture. Air is
directed equally to the windshield
and the floor outlets. When defog is
selected, the system turns off
recirculation and runs the air
conditioning compressor unless the
outside temperature is below
4°C (40°F).
available.
On hot days, open the windows to
let hot inside air escape; then close
them. This helps to reduce the time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-4
Climate Controls
The air conditioning system
removes moisture from the air,
so a small amount of water may drip
under the vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is
normal.
This mode helps to quickly heat or
cool the air inside the vehicle once
the temperature inside the vehicle is
equal to or better than the outside
temperature. It can be used to
prevent outside air and odors
from entering the vehicle. The
recirculation mode is not available in
outside air, floor, defog, or defrost
modes. If the button is selected
while in these modes, the indicator
flashes three times.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
< (Rear Window Defogger): The
rear window defogger turns off
automatically after it has been
activated for 10 minutes. It can be
turned off manually, by pressing the
button again or by turning the
ignition to the LOCK/OFF position.
The rear window defogger can be
turned on again for additional
window clearing. The length of
defogger operation will increase if
the vehicle is being driven.
: (Outside Air): Press to turn
on outside air. An indicator light
comes on to show that it is on.
Outside air will circulate throughout
the vehicle.
? (Recirculation): Press to
turn on the recirculation mode.
An indicator light comes on to
show that it is on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-5
.
If the airflow seems low when
the fan is at the highest setting,
the passenger compartment air
filter, if equipped, may need to
replaced. For more information,
see Passenger Compartment Air
Filter on page 8‑6 and
For vehicles with heated outside
rearview mirrors, the mirrors heat to
help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirror when the rear
window defog button is pressed.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑15.
Air Vents
Use the thumbwheel located below
or to the side of the outlet, to
change the direction of the air flow.
Operation Tips
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2.
.
Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from the air inlets at
the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into
the vehicle.
Notice: Do not use anything
sharp on the inside of the rear
window. If you do, you could cut
or damage the warming grid, and
the repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
attach a temporary vehicle
.
If fogging reoccurs while in vent
or bi-level modes with mild
temperature throughout the
vehicle, turn on the air
conditioner to reduce
windshield fogging.
.
Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors may adversely affect
the performance of the system.
.
license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside the
vehicle more effectively.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-6
Climate Controls
To change the passenger
compartment air filter:
6. Remove the air inlet grille.
Maintenance
7. Remove the water deflector
plate.
1. Turn off the ignition when the
windshield wipers are in the up
position.
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The vehicle has a passenger
compartment particulate air filter.
It is located in the engine
8. Remove the old passenger
compartment air filter.
2. Raise the vehicle hood.
9. Reverse the steps to install the
new air filter.
3. Pull back the hood weatherstrip
from the passenger side of the
vehicle halfway to center.
compartment, below the air inlet
grille on the passenger side.
For best climate control system
performance, reinstall the air filter.
The filter traps most of the pollen
from air entering the climate control
system. It needs to be changed
periodically to ensure system
performance. For information on
how often to change the passenger
compartment air filter, see
For the type of filter to use, see
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 11‑8.
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2.
4. Remove the air inlet grille
retainers.
5. Lift the air inlet grille and
disconnect the washer hose at
the quick-connect.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Fuel
9-1
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Parking Over Things
Driving and
Operating
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-36
California Fuel
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-36
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-37
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Filling a Portable Fuel
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Engine Exhaust
Driving Information
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-25
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Towing
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Electronic Stability
Starting and Operating
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-16
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Retained Accessory
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-2
Driving and Operating
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Driving Information
WARNING (Continued)
Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
Defensive Driving
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
your safety belt, see Safety Belts on
page 3‑10.
Police records show that almost
40 percent of all motor
Drunk Driving
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these
deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving.
In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do and be ready.
In addition:
Drinking and then driving is
very dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
.
Allow enough following
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
(Continued)
The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem is
for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-3
Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person's system can
make crash injuries worse,
And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the
surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of
the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force
applied.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑19.
especially injuries to the brain,
spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is
in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not
been drinking.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding to
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is
reaction time.
Avoid needless heavy braking.
Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration
Average reaction time is about
three‐fourths of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as
two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and
eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs, and frustration.
But even in three‐fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems
followed by heavy braking — rather
than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. The brakes might not
have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster with a lot of heavy
braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic following
distances eliminates a lot of
help to control the vehicle while
driving — brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle. See Traction Control
100 km/h (60 mph) travels
unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
20 m (66 ft). That could be a lot of
distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between
the vehicle and others is important.
System (TCS) on page 9‑29.
Adding non‐dealer accessories
can affect vehicle performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4
Driving and Operating
If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the pedal could get harder to push
down. If the engine stops, there will
still be some power brake assist but
it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is
used up, it can take longer to stop
and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Steering in Emergencies
Steering
There are times when steering can
be more effective than braking. For
example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there is
no room. That is the time for
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops or the
system is not functioning, the
vehicle can be steered but it will
take more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
Traction in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road
surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
While in a curve, speed is the one
factor that can be controlled.
evasive action — steering around
the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in
emergencies like these. First apply
the brakes — but, unless the vehicle
has antilock brakes, not enough to
lock the wheels. See Braking on
page 9‑3. It is better to remove as
much speed as possible from a
If there is a need to reduce speed,
do it before entering the curve, while
the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can
drive through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and
then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-5
collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
the vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. Turn the steering wheel
8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), about
one-eighth turn, until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.
If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
positions, it can be turned a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
If the level of the shoulder is only
slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
off the accelerator and then, if there
is nothing in the way, steer so that
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-6
Driving and Operating
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to
slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance will be
longer and vehicle control more
limited.
If the vehicle has the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), remember: It helps
avoid only the braking skid. If the
vehicle does not have ABS, then in
a braking skid, where the wheels
are no longer rolling, release
enough pressure on the brakes to
get the wheels rolling again. This
restores steering control. Push the
brake pedal down steadily when you
have to stop suddenly. As long as
the wheels are rolling, you will have
steering control.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions,
and by not overdriving those
conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond
to the vehicle's three control
systems. In the braking skid, the
While driving on a surface with
reduced traction, try to avoid
sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not
realize the surface is slippery until
the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when you
have any doubt.
wheels are not rolling. In the
steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Other Rainy Weather Tips
9-7
Driving on Wet Roads
WARNING (Continued)
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep‐standing or flowing water.
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
.
.
.
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.
.
.
Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.
WARNING
{
Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on
page 10‑38.
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
.
Turn off cruise control.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under your vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast
enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
(Continued)
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-8
Driving and Operating
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
WARNING
{
Always be alert and pay attention to
your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle
and rest.
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in
Other driving tips include:
good shape.
.
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
.
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
Keep your eyes moving — scan
.
Shift to a lower gear when going
the road ahead and to the sides.
down steep or long hills.
.
Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-9
.
Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
WARNING
{
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
surface under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑27 improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You
could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.
Winter Driving
slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or
grip. Wet ice can occur at about
0°C (32°F) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less
traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or
in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy
when the surrounding roads are
clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
.
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in
your own lane.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Turn off cruise control on
slippery surfaces.
Top of hills: Be
alert — something could
be in your lane (stalled car,
accident).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-10
Driving and Operating
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be in a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside
Assistance Program on page 13‑7.
To get help and keep everyone in
the vehicle safe:
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑24.
.
Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
Snow can trap exhaust
gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly
.
Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
CO (Carbon Monoxide) gas to
get inside. CO could overcome
you and kill you. You cannot see
it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear
away snow from around the base
of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
flashers.
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside
.
Open a window about
mirror.
5 cm (2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
WARNING
{
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death.
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
.
Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside the
vehicle and set the fan speed
to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System
in the Index.
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the
engine off and close the window
most of the way to save heat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-11
Repeat this until help arrives
but only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold.
Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
Index. If stuck too severely for the
traction system to free the vehicle,
turn the traction system off and use
the rocking method.
Rocking the Vehicle to
Get it Out
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any traction or
stability system. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission
wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while
shifting, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward
and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. If that does not get the
vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑74.
WARNING
{
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
above 55 km/h (35 mph) as
shown on the speedometer.
If the Vehicle is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 10‑58.
If the vehicle has a traction
system, it can often help to free
a stuck vehicle. Refer to the
vehicle's traction system in the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-12
Driving and Operating
Tire and Loading Information
Label
and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds. The vehicle
capacity weight includes the
weight of all occupants, cargo,
and all nonfactory‐installed
options.
Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how
much weight your vehicle can
carry. Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Vehicle Certification label.
The Tire and Loading
Information label also lists
the tire size of the original
equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation,
see Tires on page 10‑38 and
Tire Pressure on page 10‑44 .
WARNING
{
Do not load the vehicle
any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight
Label Example
Rating (GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to
lose control and crash.
A vehicle-specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle's center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver
door open, you will find the
label attached below the
door lock post (striker). The
Tire and Loading Information
label lists the number of
There is also important loading
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axle, see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Also, overloading can shorten
the life of the vehicle.
occupant seating positions (A),
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-13
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lbs).
1. Locate the statement
“The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
placard.
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step³4.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity for
your vehicle.
Example 1
A. Maximum Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 1 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs)
3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and
there will be five 150 lb
136 kg (300 lbs)
C. Available Occupant and
If your vehicle can tow a trailer,
see Trailer Towing on page 9‑44
for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules, and trailering tips.
Cargo Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs)
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-14
Driving and Operating
positions. The combined weight
of the driver, passengers, and
cargo should never exceed your
vehicle's maximum vehicle
capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2
Example 3
A. Maximum Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 2 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs)
A. Maximum Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =
340 kg (750 lbs)
453 kg (1,000 lbs)
A vehicle-specific Certification
label is found on the rear edge
of the driver door.
C. Available Cargo Weight =
113 kg (250 lbs)
C. Available Cargo Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs)
Refer to your vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about your
vehicle's maximum vehicle
capacity weight and seating
The label shows the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle,
called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-15
The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo.
Notice : Overloading the
vehicle may cause damage.
Repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
WARNING (Continued)
far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight
evenly.
Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either
the front or rear axle.
Do not overload the vehicle.
If things like suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything else are
put inside the vehicle, they will
go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash,
they will keep going.
.
Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
If there is a heavy load, it should
be spread out.
WARNING
{
.
.
.
Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
Do not load the vehicle
any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight
WARNING
{
When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure
it whenever you can.
Things you put inside the
vehicle can strike and injure
people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
Rating (GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to
lose control and crash.
Do not leave a seat folded
down unless you need to.
.
Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. In the
cargo area, put them as
(Continued)
Also, overloading can shorten
the life of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-16
Driving and Operating
.
Do not tow a trailer during
break-in. See Trailer Towing
on page 9‑44 for the trailer
towing capabilities of your
vehicle and more
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition
must be in ON/RUN and the brake
pedal must be applied.
Starting and
Operating
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key to turn in the ignition could
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in,
and turn it only with your hand.
If the key cannot be turned by
hand, see your dealer.
New Vehicle Break-In
information.
Notice: The vehicle does not
need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
Following break‐in, engine speed
and load can be gradually
increased.
.
Do not drive at any
Ignition Positions
one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 805 km
(500 miles). Do not make
full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or
slow the vehicle.
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
stopped, turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
will remain active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑18
.
Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 miles) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
linings.
This position locks the ignition.
It also locks the transmission. This
is the only position in which the
ignition key can be inserted or
removed.
The ignition switch has four different
positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-17
Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
3. Come to a complete stop, shift
to P (Park), and turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
an automatic transmission, the
shift lever must be in P (Park) to
turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position.
C (ON/RUN): This position can
be used to operate the electrical
accessories and to display some
instrument panel cluster warning
and indicator lights. The switch
stays in this position when the
engine is running.
In an emergency:
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the
4. Set the parking brake. See
If you leave the key in the ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to
start the vehicle if the battery is
allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
Parking Brake on page 9‑29
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force.
The steering can bind with the
wheels turned off center. If this
happens, move the steering wheel
from left to right while turning the
key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn't work, then the vehicle
needs service.
2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This
can be done while the vehicle is
moving. After shifting to neutral,
firmly apply the brakes and steer
the vehicle to a safe location.
D (START): This is the position that
starts the engine. When the engine
starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for
driving.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the
position in which you can operate
the radio and windshield wipers
while the engine is off. To use
ACC/ACCESSORY, turn the key
clockwise.
A warning chime will sound and the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will
display DRIVER DOOR OPEN
when the driver door is opened, the
ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF, and the key is in the
ignition. See Door Ajar Messages
on page 5‑29 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-18
Driving and Operating
The vehicle has a
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
engine turned off:
Starting the Engine
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position,
and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for
a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To
prevent gear damage, this
system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped
by turning the ignition switch to
the ACC/ACCESSORY or
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
.
Audio System
Notice: Do not try to shift to
.
Power Windows
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
The radio will work when the key is
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
Once the key is turned from ON/
RUN to LOCK/OFF the radio will
continue to work 10 minutes or until
the driver door is opened. The
power windows will continue to work
for up to 10 minutes or until any
door is opened.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition to START.
When the engine starts, let go of
the key. The idle speed will slow
down as the engine warms. Do
not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
LOCK/OFF position.
engine and transmission gently
to allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-19
When the Low Fuel warning
lamp is on and the FUEL LEVEL
LOW message is displayed in
the Driver Information Center
(DIC), the Computer‐Controlled
Cranking System is disabled to
prevent possible vehicle
component damage. When this
happens, hold the ignition switch
in the START position to
2. If the engine does not start after
5‐10 seconds, especially in very
cold weather (below −18°C or
0°F), it could be flooded with too
much gasoline. Try pushing the
accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as
you hold the key in START for
up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds
This clears the extra gasoline
from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting
it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently until the oil
warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to
work with the electronics in the
vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change
the way the engine operates.
Before adding electrical
continue engine cranking.
between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down.
When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then
stops again, repeat these steps.
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning
the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
cranking motor cool down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-20
Driving and Operating
Engine Heater
The engine coolant heater can
provide easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine
warm‐up in cold weather conditions
at or below −18°C (0°F). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater
should be plugged in at least four
hours before starting.
Shifting Into Park
WARNING
{
WARNING
Plugging the cord into an
{
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑41.
To Use the Engine Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord. The cord is
attached to the underside of the
diagonal brace, which is located
above the engine air cleaner/
filter assembly.
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts,
and prevent damage.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-21
Steering Column Shift Lever
Console Shift Lever
Leaving the Vehicle With the
Engine Running
If the vehicle has a steering column
shift lever, use this procedure to
shift the vehicle into P (Park):
If the vehicle is equipped with a
console shift lever, use this
procedure to shift the vehicle into
P (Park):
WARNING
{
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it
could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by pulling the shift lever toward
you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by pushing the lever all the way
toward the front of the vehicle.
3. With your foot still holding the
brake pedal down, set the
parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 9‑29 for more
information.
3. While keeping the brake pedal
applied, set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 9‑29
for more information.
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
4. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF.
4. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle
with the ignition key in your
If you have to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, be sure your
vehicle is in P (Park) and the
parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. See Parking Brake on
page 9‑29 for more information.
5. Remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle
with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-22
Driving and Operating
Console Shift
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park
If the console shift lever cannot be
moved out of P (Park):
Torque lock is when the weight
of the vehicle puts too much force
on the parking pawl in the
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock
1. Apply and maintain the regular
brakes.
The vehicle has an electronic shift
lock release system. The shift lock
release is designed to:
transmission. This happens when
parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not
done properly and then it is difficult
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see “Shifting Into Park” in
this section.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN
position. See Ignition Positions
on page 9‑16 for more
information.
.
Prevent ignition key removal
unless the shift lever is in
P (Park).
3. Let up on the shift lever and
make sure the shift lever is
.
Prevent movement of the shift
lever out of P (Park), unless the
ignition is in ON/RUN and the
regular brake pedal is applied.
pushed all the way into P (Park).
If torque lock does occur, your
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park).
4. Press the shift lever button.
5. Then, move the shift into the
desired gear.
The shift lock is always functional
except in the case of a an
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), consult your
dealer or a professional towing
service.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑70.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-23
Column Shift
3. Shift out of the P (Park) position
to the N (Neutral) position.
Parking Over Things
That Burn
If the column shift lever cannot be
moved out of P (Park):
4. Move the vehicle to a safe
location.
1. Apply and maintain the regular
brakes.
WARNING
{
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), consult your
dealer or a professional towing
service.
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
2. Turn the ignition key to the
ON/RUN position. See Ignition
Positions on page 9‑16 for more
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-24
Driving and Operating
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
Engine Exhaust
WARNING (Continued)
.
There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or after-market
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
WARNING
{
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
WARNING
{
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑24.
.
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
.
Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
.
The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
.
The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
.
The vehicle’s exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-25
P (Park): This position locks the
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when the engine is started
because the vehicle cannot
move easily.
Automatic
Transmission
The automatic transmission has a
shift lever on the steering column or
on the console between the seats.
WARNING
{
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
WARNING
{
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑41.
There is a display, located on the
instrument panel cluster, that will
indicate the gear the vehicle is in.
Maximum engine speed is limited on
automatic transmission vehicles
while in P (Park) or N (Neutral) to
protect driveline components from
improper operation.
Follow the proper steps to be sure
the vehicle will not move. See
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑20.
There are several different positions
for the shift lever.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑41.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-26
Driving and Operating
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
N (Neutral): In this position,
the engine does not connect with
the wheels. To restart the engine
when the vehicle is already moving,
use N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
being towed.
D (Drive) : This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
system. You must fully apply the
brakes first, then press the shift
lever button before you can shift
from P (Park) while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
lever and push the shift lever all the
way into P (Park) as you maintain
brake application. Then press the
shift lever button and move the shift
lever into another gear. See Shifting
Out of Park on page 9‑22.
.
Going less than 55 km/h
(35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
.
Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
WARNING
{
more, push the accelerator pedal
all the way down.
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
The transmission will shift down
to the next gear and the vehicle
will have more power.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Downshifting the transmission in
slippery road conditions could result
in skidding, see “Skidding” under
Loss of Control on page 9‑5.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
Notice: Driving the vehicle if you
notice that it is moving slowly or
not shifting gears as you increase
speed may damage the
transmission. Have the vehicle
serviced right away. You can
drive in 2 (Second) when you are
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)
or N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice, or sand without
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-27
driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h)
and D (Drive) for higher speeds
until then.
Also, shifting into 2 (Second) at
speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h)
can cause damage. Drive in
3 (Third) or D (Drive) instead of
2 (Second).
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
The vehicle might have the Antilock
Brake System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
3 (Third): This position is also used
for normal driving. However, it
reduces vehicle speed more than
D (Drive) without using the brakes.
You might choose 3 (Third) instead
of D (Drive) when driving on hilly,
winding roads, when towing a trailer,
so there is less shifting between
gears and when going down a
steep hill.
1 (First): This position reduces
vehicle speed even more than
2 (Second) without using the brakes.
You can use it on very steep hills,
or in deep snow or mud. If the shift
lever is in 1 (First) while the vehicle
is moving forward, the transmission
will not shift into first gear until the
vehicle is going slowly enough.
2 (Second): This position reduces
vehicle speed even more than
3 (Third) without using the brakes.
You can use 2 (Second) on hills.
It can help control vehicle speed as
you go down steep mountain roads.
You would also want to use the
brakes off and on.
Notice: Spinning the tires or
holding the vehicle in one place
on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage
the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. If you are stuck, do not
spin the tires. When stopping on
a hill, use the brakes to hold the
vehicle in place.
If the vehicle has ABS, this warning
light comes on briefly when the
vehicle is started.
The warning light is on the
instrument panel cluster. See
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on page 5‑20.
Notice: Driving in 2 (Second) for
more than 25 miles (40 km) or at
speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)
may damage the transmission.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-28
Driving and Operating
Let us say the road is wet and you
are driving safely. Suddenly, an
animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes and
continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
the wrong thing to do. The wheels
can stop rolling. Once they do, the
vehicle cannot respond to the
driver's steering. Momentum will
carry it in whatever direction it was
headed when the wheels stopped
rolling. That could be off the road,
into the very thing the driver was
trying to avoid, or into traffic.
A computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the
brakes at each wheel.
If the vehicle does not have ABS,
use a “squeeze” braking technique.
This gives maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. Do this
by pushing on the brake pedal with
steadily increasing pressure. In an
emergency, you will probably want
to squeeze the brakes hard without
locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the
brake pedal. This helps retain
Using ABS
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
antilock work. You might feel a slight
brake pedal pulsation or hear some
noise, but this is normal.
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver
gets into a situation that requires
hard braking.
steering control.
In many emergencies, steering can
help more than even the very best
braking.
If the vehicle has ABS, it allows the
driver to steer and brake at the
same time. However, if the vehicle
does not have ABS, the first
reaction — to hit the brake pedal
hard and hold it down — might be
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-29
A warning chime will sound and a
brake warning light located on the
instrument panel cluster will come
on, if the parking brake is set, the
ignition is on, and the vehicle speed
is greater than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Parking Brake
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The vehicle may have a Traction
Control System (TCS) that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful
in slippery road conditions. The
system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels
are spinning or beginning to lose
traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power and
may also upshift the transmission
and apply the front brakes to limit
wheel spin.
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before
driving.
The parking brake is located to the
left of the brake pedal, near the
driver door.
If you are towing a trailer and
parking on any hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑41.
To set the parking brake, hold the
brake pedal down, then push down
the parking brake pedal.
To release the parking brake, hold
the brake pedal down and push the
parking brake pedal. When you lift
your foot off the parking brake
pedal, the pedal will follow it to the
released position.
This light will flash when the TCS is
limiting wheel spin.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-30
Driving and Operating
The system may be heard or
felt while it is working, but this
is normal.
and rocking the vehicle is required.
See If the Vehicle is Stuck on
page 9‑11 for more information.
If cruise control is being used when
TCS begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically
disengage. Cruise control may be
reengaged when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
page 9‑32.
When the system is on, this warning
light comes on and stays on if there
is a problem.
A SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
message also appears on the DIC.
When this warning light is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
See Ride Control System Messages
on page 5‑32 for more information.
To turn the system on or off, press
the Traction Control button located
on the instrument panel.
The TCS operates in all
transmission shift lever positions.
But the system can upshift the
transmission only as high as the
shift lever position chosen, so
use the lower gears only when
necessary. See Automatic
When the system is turned off, the
traction control warning light comes
on and TRACTION CONTROL OFF
appears on the DIC. If the traction
control system is limiting wheel spin
when the button is pressed to turn
the system off, the warning light
comes on and the system will turn
off right away.
To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, TCS
should always be left on. But the
system can be turned off if needed.
Turn the system off if the vehicle
gets stuck in sand, mud, or snow
Transmission on page 9‑25.
Press the Traction Control button
again to turn the system back on.
The Traction Control warning light
should go off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-31
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
affect the vehicle's performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑3 for more information.
If the system fails to turn on or
activate, the ESC/TCS light will be
on solid, and the SERVICE
STABILITRAK message will be
displayed.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See
Ride Control System Messages on
page 5‑32.
The Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system is
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)
Your vehicle may have an Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system
which combines antilock brake,
traction, and stability control
systems and helps the driver
maintain directional control of the
vehicle in most driving conditions.
For more information, see Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5‑32.
automatically enabled whenever you
start your vehicle. To assist the
driver with vehicle directional
control, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave
the system on. But, you can turn
ESC off if you ever need to.
If the vehicle is in cruise control
when the system begins to assist
the driver maintain directional
control of the vehicle, the ESC/TCS
light will flash and the cruise control
will automatically disengage. When
road conditions allow you to use
When you first start your vehicle
and begin to drive away, the system
performs several diagnostic checks
to ensure there are no problems.
You may hear or feel the system
working. This is normal and does
not mean there is a problem with
your vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches
32 km/h (20 mph).
This light will flash on the instrument
panel cluster when the ESC system
is both on and activated.
You may also feel or hear the
system working; this is normal.
When the light is on solid and the
SERVICE STABILITRAK message
is displayed, the system will not
assist the driver in maintaining
directional control of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-32
Driving and Operating
cruise again, you may re-engage
the cruise control. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑32.
to turn the system off if your vehicle
is stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow,
and you want to “rock” your vehicle
to attempt to free it. It may also be
necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road
conditions where high wheel spin is
required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck
on page 9‑11.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can
maintain a speed of about 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more without keeping
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
WARNING
{
ESC may also turn off automatically
if it determines that a problem exists
with the system. The SERVICE
STABILITRAK message and the
ESC/TCS light will be on solid to
warn the driver that ESC is disabled
and requires service. If the problem
does not clear after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer
for service. See Ride Control
The ESC/TCS button is located on
the instrument panel.
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
The traction control system can be
turned off or back on by pressing
the ESC/TCS button. To disable
both traction control and ESC, press
and hold the button briefly.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
When the ESC system is turned off,
the TRACTION CONTROL OFF
message will appear, and the
ESC/TCS light will be on solid to
warn the driver that both traction
control and ESC are disabled.
System Messages on page 5‑32 for
more information.
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
affect your vehicle's performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑3 for more information.
It is recommended to leave the
system on for normal driving
conditions, but it may be necessary
If your vehicle has the Traction
Control System (TCS) and the
cruise control is on, TCS will begin
to limit wheel spin and the cruise
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-33
control automatically turns off . See
Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑29. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, the
cruise control can be turned
back on.
+RES (Resume/Accelerate):
Press briefly to make the vehicle
resume to a previously set speed,
or press and hold to accelerate.
3. Press and release the
SET– button located on the
steering wheel.
4. Take your foot off the
accelerator.
SET– : Press to set the speed and
activate cruise control or make the
vehicle decelerate.
Resuming a Set Speed
If cruise control is set at a desired
speed and then the brakes are
applied, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the
set speed from memory.
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control
The cruise control light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on
after the cruise control has been set
to the desired speed. See
Once the vehicle speed is
40 km/h (25 mph) or greater, press
the +RES button on the steering
wheel. The vehicle returns to the
previously selected speed and
stays there.
Instrument Cluster on page 5‑11.
If the cruise button is on when not in
use, it could get bumped and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control switch off when cruise
is not being used.
The cruise control buttons are
located on left side of the steering
wheel.
T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise
control on and off. The indicator is lit
when cruise control is on.
1. Press the T button to turn the
cruise system on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-34
Driving and Operating
.
To slow down in small amounts,
press the SET– button briefly.
Each time this is done, the
vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) slower.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise
control:
If the cruise control system is
already activated:
.
To disengage cruise control,
.
Press and hold the +RES button
step lightly on the brake pedal.
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
on the steering wheel until the
desired speed is reached, then
release it.
.
Press the [ button on the
steering wheel.
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase vehicle speed. When you
take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the cruise
speed you set earlier.
.
To turn off the cruise control,
.
To increase vehicle speed in
press the T button on the
steering wheel.
small increments, press the
+RES button. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Erasing Speed Memory
Using Cruise Control on Hills
The cruise control set speed
memory is erased from memory by
How well the cruise control will work
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your
speed. When going downhill, you
might have to brake or shift to a
lower gear to keep your speed
down. If the brakes are applied the
cruise control will turn off.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
pressing T or if the ignition is
turned off.
If the cruise control system is
already activated:
.
Press and hold the SET– button
on the steering wheel until the
lower speed desired is reached,
then release it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-35
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
and a yellow fuel cap can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 9‑37. For all other vehicles,
use only the unleaded gasoline
described under Recommended
Fuel on page 9‑35.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an
important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
Recommended Fuel
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
Use regular unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane rating of 87 or
higher. If the octane rating is less
than 87, an audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-36
Driving and Operating
be affected. The malfunction
Gasoline Specifications
Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now
required to contain additives that
help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing the
emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑17. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet
ASTM specification D 4814 in the
United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing
additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
on page 9‑36 for additional
information.
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
If you plan on driving in another
country outside the United States or
Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded
gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text
on fuel. Costly repairs caused by
use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
additive required to meet
U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency regulations. To help keep
fuel injectors and intake valves
clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER
label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced
detergency standards developed by
the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
California Fuel
Requirements
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards, it is
designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California emissions
standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
To check the fuel availability, ask an
auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-37
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
tank at every engine oil change,
can help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
System Treatment PLUS is the only
gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors. It is available at
your dealer.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
and a yellow fuel cap can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
For all other vehicles, use only the
unleaded gasoline described under
Recommended Fuel on page 9‑35.
We encourage the use of E85 in
vehicles that are designed to use it.
The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”
fuel, meaning it is made from
renewable sources such as corn
and other crops.
Some gasolines that are not
reformulated for low emissions can
contain an octane-enhancing
additive called
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines might be
available in your area. We
recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed
for those fuels.
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the
performance of the emission control
system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer for service.
Many service stations will not have
an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump
available. The U.S. Department of
Energy has an alternative fuels
website (www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/
infrastructure/locator.html) that can
help you find E85 fuel. Those
stations that do have E85 should
have a label indicating ethanol
content. Do not use the fuel if the
ethanol content is greater than 85%.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-38
Driving and Operating
At a minimum, E85 should meet
ASTM Specification D 5798. By
definition, this means that fuel
labeled E85 will have an ethanol
content between 70% and 85%.
Filling the fuel tank with fuel
mixtures that do not meet ASTM
specifications can affect driveability
and could cause the malfunction
indicator lamp to come on.
that you add as much fuel as
possible — do not add less than
11 L (three gallons) when refueling.
You should drive the vehicle
immediately after refueling for at
least 11 km (seven miles) to allow
the vehicle to adapt to the change in
ethanol concentration.
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Filling the Tank
WARNING
{
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
or when refueling the vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and
smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling the
vehicle. This is against the law in
some places. Do not re-enter the
vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep
children away from the fuel pump;
never let children pump fuel.
E85 has less energy per gallon than
gasoline, so you will need to refill
the fuel tank more often when using
E85 than when you are using
gasoline. See Filling the Tank on
page 9‑38.
To ensure quick starts in the
wintertime, the E85 fuel must be
formulated properly for your climate
according to ASTM specification
D 5798. If you have trouble starting
on E85, it could be because the
E85 fuel is not properly formulated
for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding
gasoline to the fuel tank can
improve starting. For good starting
and heater efficiency below 0°C
(32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
should contain no more than
Notice: Some additives are not
compatible with E85 fuel and can
harm the vehicle's fuel system.
Do not add anything to E85.
Damage caused by additives
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
70% ethanol. It is best not to
alternate repeatedly between
gasoline and E85. If you do
switch fuels, it is recommended
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-39
While refueling, hang the tethered
fuel cap on the hook on the inside of
the fuel door.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See
“Washing the Vehicle” in
WARNING
{
Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be
badly burned. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
Exterior Care.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it
clockwise until it clicks. Make sure
the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑17.
The tethered fuel cap is located
behind a hinged fuel door on the
driver side of the vehicle. If the
vehicle has E85 fuel capability, the
fuel cap will be yellow and state
that E85 or gasoline can be used.
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 9‑37.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it
slowly counterclockwise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-40
Driving and Operating
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message
displays on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. See Fuel System
Messages on page 5‑32 for more
information.
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNING (Continued)
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact
with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.
WARNING
{
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
and others:
WARNING
{
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
.
.
Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.
Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel.
.
Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.
.
Notice: If a new fuel cap is
needed, be sure to get the right
type of cap from your dealer.
The wrong type fuel cap might
not fit properly, might cause the
malfunction indicator lamp to
light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 5‑17.
Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-41
.
Then, during the first 800 km
(500 miles) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
(50 mph) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of
the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
vehicle such as a motorhome, see
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 10‑74.
Towing
General Towing
Information
Only use towing equipment that has
been designed for the vehicle.
Contact your dealer or trailering
dealer for assistance with preparing
the vehicle for towing a trailer.
Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips
Pulling a Trailer
.
Obey speed limit restrictions
when towing a trailer. Do not
drive faster than the maximum
posted speed for trailers, or no
more than 90 km/h (55 mph), to
save wear on the vehicle's parts.
Here are some important points:
.
There are many different laws,
See the following trailer towing
information in this section:
including speed limit restrictions,
having to do with trailering.
Make sure the rig will be legal,
not only where you live but also
where you will be driving.
A good source for this
.
For information on driving while
towing a trailer, see “Driving
Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
.
Do not tow a trailer when the
outside temperature is above
38°C (100°F).
information can be state or
.
For maximum vehicle and trailer
weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
provincial police.
Three important considerations
have to do with weight:
.
Do not tow a trailer at all during
.
For information on equipment to
tow a trailer, see “Towing
Equipment.”
.
the weight of the trailer,
the first 1600 km (1,000 miles)
the new vehicle is driven. The
engine, transmission or other
parts could be damaged. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty.
.
the weight of the trailer tongue
.
and the total weight on the
For information on towing a disabled
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑74. For information on
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle's tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-42
Driving and Operating
Driving with a Trailer
Following Distance
Making Turns
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Get to know
the rig before setting out for the
open road. Get acquainted with the
feel of handling and braking with the
added weight of the trailer. And
always keep in mind that the vehicle
you are driving is now longer and
not as responsive as the vehicle is
by itself.
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations
that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so
the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees
or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Passing
More passing distance is needed
when towing a trailer. Because the
rig is longer, it is necessary to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before returning to the lane.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch
parts and attachments, safety
chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments. If the
trailer has electric brakes, start the
vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by
hand to be sure the brakes are
working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
Backing Up
Turn Signals When Towing a
Trailer
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone
The arrows on the instrument panel
flash whenever signaling a turn or
lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling
other drivers the vehicle is turning,
changing lanes or stopping.
During the trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
guide you.
When towing a trailer, the arrows
on the instrument panel flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the
trailer are burned out.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-43
For this reason you may think other
drivers are seeing the signal when
they are not. It is important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
transmission overheating. If the
engine does overheat, see Engine
Overheating on page 10‑19.
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the brake pedal
until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into P (Park).
Parking on Hills
Driving on Grades
WARNING
{
5. Release the brake pedal.
Notice: Do not tow on steep
continuous grades exceeding
9.6 km (6 miles). Extended, higher
than normal engine and
transmission temperatures may
result and damage the vehicle.
Frequent stops are very important
to allow the engine and
Parking the vehicle on a hill with
the trailer attached can be
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
while you:
.
start the engine,
.
shift into a gear, and
.
transmission to cool.
release the parking brake.
Reduce speed and shift to a
lower gear before starting down a
long or steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down, the
brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and
no longer work well.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
If parking the rig on a hill:
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
1. Press the brake pedal, but
do not shift into P (Park) yet.
Turn the wheels into the curb if
facing downhill or into traffic if
facing uphill.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce the vehicle's speed to
around 70 km/h (45 mph) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-44
Driving and Operating
Maintenance When Trailer
Towing
Changing a Tire When Trailer
Towing
WARNING (Continued)
Ask your dealer for advice and
information about towing a trailer
with the vehicle.
The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 for more information.
Things that are especially important
in trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, belts,
cooling system and brake system.
It is a good idea to inspect these
before and during the trip.
If the vehicle gets a flat tire while
towing a trailer, be sure to secure
the trailer and disconnect it from the
vehicle before changing the tire.
Notice: Pulling a trailer
Trailer Towing
improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly
repairs not covered by the
vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer
correctly, follow the advice in this
section and see your dealer for
important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
WARNING
{
The driver can lose control when
pulling a trailer if the correct
equipment is not used or the
vehicle is not driven properly.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well — or even at all. The driver
and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may
also be damaged; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
only if all the steps in this section
have been followed.
Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer
Towing
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is
equipped with the proper trailer
towing equipment. To identify the
trailering capacity of the vehicle,
read the information in “Weight of
the Trailer” that appears later in this
section. Trailering is different than
just driving the vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in
The cooling system may temporarily
overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 10‑19.
handling, acceleration, braking,
durability and fuel economy.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-45
Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
Ask your dealer for trailering
Weight of the Trailer
information or advice, or write us at
our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices
on page 13‑4 for more information.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than
454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that
can be too heavy.
The following information has many
time-tested, important trailering tips
and safety rules. Many of these are
important for the safety of the
driver and the passengers. So
please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
It depends on how the rig is used.
For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and
how much the vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can
depend on any special equipment
on the vehicle, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
If there are a lot of options,
Load-pulling components such as
the engine, transmission, axles,
wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the
drag of the added weight. The
engine is required to operate at
relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements.
equipment, passengers or
information.
cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce
the tongue weight the vehicle can
carry, which will also reduce the
trailer weight the vehicle can tow.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the
required trailering equipment.
The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-46
Driving and Operating
If towing a trailer, the tongue load
must be added to the GVW because
the vehicle will be carrying that
weight, too. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑12 for more information
about the vehicle's maximum load
capacity.
After loading the trailer, weigh the
trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Towing Equipment
Hitches
It is important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is
needed. Here are some rules to
follow:
Total Weight on the
Vehicle's Tires
Be sure the vehicle's tires are
inflated to the upper limit for cold
tires. These numbers can be found
on the Certification/Tire label. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12.
Make sure not to go over the GVW
limit for the vehicle, including the
weight of the trailer tongue.
.
The rear bumper on the vehicle
is not intended for hitches. Do
not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
.
Will any holes be made in the
body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If there
are, then be sure to seal the
holes later when the hitch is
removed. If the holes are not
sealed, dirt, water, and deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from the
exhaust can get into the vehicle.
See Engine Exhaust on
Using a weight-carrying hitch, the
trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
page 9‑24 in the Index for more
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-47
Safety Chains
Trailer Brakes
Conversions and
Add-Ons
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the
tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains
may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer's recommendation for
attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so the rig
can turn. Never allow safety chains
to drag on the ground.
Because the vehicle has antilock
brakes, do not try to tap into the
vehicle's hydraulic brake system.
If you do, both brake systems will
not work well, or at all.
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Does your trailer have its own
brakes? Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so you will be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑38 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑39.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-48
Driving and Operating
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-1
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-19
Overheated Engine
Protection
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-32
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-33
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Vehicle Care
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-21
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-26
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Park Brake and P (Park)
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3
Accessories and
Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Instrument Panel Fuse
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-13
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Wheels and Tires
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-27
Wiper Blade
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-39
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Tire Terminology and
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal, Sidemarker, and
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-2
Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New
Jump Starting
General Information
For service and parts needs, visit
your dealer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-57
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-68
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-3
California Proposition
65 Warning
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
Accessories and
Modifications
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained in
remote keyless transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Adding non‐dealer accessories to
the vehicle can affect vehicle
performance and safety, including
such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling,
emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems
like antilock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from the installation or use
of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not
covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-4
Vehicle Care
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories.
When you go to your GM dealer and
ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and
Vehicle Checks
WARNING (Continued)
Doing Your Own
Service Work
.
Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts can
later break or fall off.
WARNING
{
supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine
GM Accessories.
You can be injured and the
vehicle could be damaged if you
try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
You could be hurt.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑39.
.
Be sure you have sufficient
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑13.
knowledge, experience,
the proper replacement
parts, and tools before
attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-5
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑38.
Hood
To open the hood, do the following:
Keep a record with all parts
receipts and list the mileage and the
date of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Records on
page 11‑9.
1. Pull the interior hood release
handle with this symbol on it.
It is located to the left of the
parking brake pedal.
2. Then go to the front of the
vehicle and release the
secondary hood latch, located
near the center of the hood front,
by pushing the latch to the right.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all
the filler caps are on properly. Then
pull the hood down and close it
firmly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-6
Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
3.5 L V6 Engine Shown, 3.9 L V6 Engine Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-7
A. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10‑22.
E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See
“Checking Coolant” under
J. Automatic Transmission Fluid
Dipstick (Out of View). See
“Checking the Fluid Level”
under Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 10‑11.
Cooling System on page 10‑15.
F. Pressure Cap. See Cooling
System on page 10‑15.
B. Battery. See Battery on
page 10‑25.
K. Brake Master Cylinder
Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 10‑23.
G. Power Steering Fluid Cap.
See Power Steering Fluid on
page 10‑21.
C. Underhood Fuse Block.
See Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10‑34.
L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 10‑13.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap.
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 10‑70.
See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
“Checking Engine Oil” under
Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-8
Vehicle Care
Checking Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the vehicle
must be on level ground. The
engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow
loop. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6 for the
location of the engine oil dipstick.
To ensure proper engine
performance and long life, careful
attention must be paid to engine oil.
Following these simple, but
important steps will help protect
your investment:
.
Always use engine oil approved
If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick, add
one liter/quart of the recommended
oil and then recheck the level. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” for
an explanation of what kind of oil to
use. For engine oil crankcase
to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil.”
Obtaining an accurate oil level
reading is essential:
.
1. If the engine has been running
recently, turn off the engine and
allow several minutes for the oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
Checking your oil level too soon
after engine shut off will not
provide an accurate oil level
reading.
Check the engine oil level
regularly and maintain the
proper oil level. See “Checking
Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Engine Oil.”
capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2.
.
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
Oil levels above or below the
acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful
to the engine. If you find that you
have an oil level above the
operating range, i.e. the engine
has so much oil that the oil level
gets above the cross-hatched
area that shows the proper
Change the engine oil at the
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑10.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
with a paper towel or cloth, then
push it back in all the way.
.
Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See “What to Do With
Used Oil.”
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-9
operating range, the engine could
be damaged. You should drain
out the excess oil or limit your
driving of the vehicle and seek a
service professional to remove
the excess amount of oil.
This certification mark indicates that
the oil has been approved to the
dexos™ specification.
Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
dexos™ is unavailable: In the event
that dexos™ approved engine oil is
not available at an oil change or for
maintaining proper oil level, you
may use substitute engine oil
displaying the API Starburst symbol
and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
Use of oils that do not meet the
dexos™ specification, however, may
result in reduced performance under
certain circumstances.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
Your vehicle was filled at the factory
with dexos™ approved engine oil.
Viscosity Grade
Notice: Use only engine oil that is
approved to the dexos™
specification or an equivalent
engine oil of the appropriate
viscosity grade. Engine oils
approved to the dexos™
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
grade for the vehicle. Do not use
other viscosity oils such as
Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Selecting the right engine oil
depends on both the proper oil
specification and viscosity grade:
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.
specification will show the
dexos™ symbol on the container.
Failure to use the recommended
engine oil or equivalent can result
in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty. If you are
unsure whether your oil is
approved to the dexos™
Specification
Use and ask for engine oils with the
dexos™ certification mark. Oils
meeting the requirements of your
vehicle should have the dexos™
certification mark on the container.
specification, ask your service
provider.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-10
Vehicle Care
be used. An oil of this viscosity
grade will provide easier cold
starting for the engine at extremely
low temperatures. When selecting
an oil of the appropriate viscosity
grade, be sure to always select
an oil that meets the required
specification, dexos™. See
your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer's warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the
trash or pouring it on the ground,
into sewers, or into streams or
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil.
“Specification” for more information.
Engine Oil Additives/Engine
Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The
recommended oils with the dexos™
specification and displaying the
dexos™ certification mark are all
that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain
elements that can be unhealthy for
your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
Cold Temperature Operation: In an
area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-11
For the oil life system to work
properly, the system must be reset
every time the oil is changed.
If the system is ever reset
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
When to Check and Change
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished, it
indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message comes on.
See DIC Warnings and Messages.
Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 1 000 km (600 miles).
It is possible that, if driving under
the best conditions, the oil life
system might indicate that an oil
change is not necessary for up to a
year. The engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year
and, at this time, the system must
be reset. Your dealer has trained
service people who will perform this
work and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly
over the course of an oil drain
interval and keep it at the
A good time to check the automatic
transmission fluid level is when the
engine oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
engine oil change. Always reset the
engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself.
To reset the system:
Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2, and be
sure to use the transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6.
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
on the DIC.
Because this operation can be a
little difficult, it may be decided to
have this done at the dealer service
department.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET
button on the DIC for more than
five seconds. The oil life will
change to 100%.
If not taken to the dealer, be sure
to follow all the instructions here,
or a false reading on the dipstick
could result.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message comes back on when the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life
system has not reset. Repeat the
procedure.
proper level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-12
Vehicle Care
Notice: Too much or too
little fluid can damage the
Get the vehicle warmed up by
driving about 24 km (15 mi) when
outside temperatures are above
10°C (50°F). If it is colder than
10°C (50°F), the vehicle may have
to be driven longer.
Then, without shutting off the
engine, follow these steps:
transmission. Too much can
mean that some of the fluid could
come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts,
starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if checking the
transmission fluid.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it
with a clean rag or paper towel.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park the vehicle on a level
place. Keep the engine running.
Wait at least 30 minutes before
checking the transmission fluid level
if you have been driving:
The transmission fluid dipstick
handle is the black loop with this
symbol on it. It is located near
the rear of the engine
2. With the parking brake applied,
place the shift lever in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake
pedal, move the shift lever
through each gear range,
.
When outside temperatures are
compartment.
above 32°C (90°F).
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6 for more
information on location.
.
At high speed for quite a while.
pausing for about three seconds
in each range. Then, position the
shift lever in P (Park).
.
In heavy traffic — especially in
hot weather.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait
three seconds, and then pull it
back out again.
4. Let the engine run at idle for
three to five minutes.
.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid
should be at normal operating
temperature, which is 82°C to
93°C (180°F to 200°F).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-13
If the fluid level is low, add only
enough of the proper fluid to bring
the level into the cross-hatched
area on the dipstick.
4. When the correct fluid level is
obtained, push the dipstick back
in all the way.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
1. Pull out the dipstick.
The engine air cleaner/filter is
located in the engine compartment
on the driver side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for more information
on location.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add
enough fluid at the dipstick hole
to bring it to the proper level.
3. Check both sides of the
dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in
the cross-hatched area.
It does not take much fluid,
generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt).
Do not overfill.
4. If the fluid level is in the
acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Notice: Use of the incorrect
automatic transmission fluid may
damage the vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission
fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on
page 11‑6.
How to Add Fluid
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals
and replace it at the first oil change
after each (80 000 km (50,000 mi)
interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more
information. If driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each
engine oil change.
Refer to Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6 to
determine what kind of transmission
fluid to use.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the
fluid level as described under
“How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in
this section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-14
Vehicle Care
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
WARNING
{
Operating the engine with the
air cleaner/filter off can cause you
or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required.
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter do the following:
2. Push the filter cover housing
toward the engine.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
3. Pull out the filter.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
5. To reinstall the cover, position
the tabs through the hinges on
the housing.
6. Push the cover tabs on top of
the housing to lock the cover
in place.
1. Lift the filter cover tabs on top of
the engine air cleaner/filter
housing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-15
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct
working temperature.
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other
than DEX-COOL® can cause
premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition,
the engine coolant could require
changing sooner, at 50 000 km
(30,000 miles) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
WARNING
{
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
3.5 L V6 Engine Shown, 3.9 L
V6 Engine Similar
(Continued)
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Pressure Cap
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
(Out of View)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-16
Vehicle Care
.
Protects against rust and
corrosion.
Engine Coolant
WARNING (Continued)
The cooling system in the vehicle is
filled with DEX-COOL® engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first.
.
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
The vehicle's coolant warning
system is set for the proper
Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.
coolant mixture. With plain water
or the wrong mixture, the engine
could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑19
other parts.
What to Use
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
Notice: If extra inhibitors
and/or additives are used in the
vehicle's cooling system, the
vehicle could be damaged. Use
only the proper mixture of the
engine coolant listed in this
manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6 for more
information.
WARNING
{
Adding only plain water or some
other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
.
Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−47°F), outside
temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up to
129°C (265°F), engine
temperature.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-17
When the engine is cold, the coolant
level should be at or above the
COLD FILL line on the coolant
recovery tank. To check the coolant
level, look for the COLD FILL line on
the side of the coolant recovery tank
that faces the engine. If the level is
not correct, there may be a leak in
the cooling system.
If coolant is needed, add the proper
DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the
coolant recovery tank.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the
coolant level.
When the coolant level in the
coolant recovery tank is at the
COLD FILL line, start the vehicle.
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the coolant recovery tank. If the
coolant inside the coolant recovery
tank is boiling, do not do anything
else until it cools down. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at
or above the COLD FILL line, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant at
the coolant recovery tank, but be
sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
If the overheat warning continues,
there is one more thing you can try.
The proper coolant mixture can be
added directly to the cooling system
through the coolant fill neck on the
engine, but be sure the system is
cool before doing it.
How to Add Coolant to the
Recovery Tank
WARNING
{
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
The coolant recovery tank
is located in the rear of the
engine compartment on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6.
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-18
Vehicle Care
2. Keep turning the pressure cap
and remove it.
How to Add Coolant to the
Radiator
WARNING (Continued)
3. Fill the cooling system with the
proper DEX-COOL coolant
Wait for the cooling system and
surge tank pressure cap to cool if
you ever have to turn the
pressure cap.
WARNING
{
mixture, up to the base of the
filler neck. See “What to use” for
more information about the
proper coolant mixture. Rinse or
wipe any spilled coolant from the
engine and the compartment.
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
If coolant is needed, add the proper
mixture directly to the radiator, but
be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
WARNING
{
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn
the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank
pressure cap, is hot.
1. Remove the pressure cap when
the cooling system, including
the pressure cap and upper
radiator hose is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap
4. Then fill the coolant recovery
tank to the COLD FILL line.
slowly counterclockwise.
If a hiss is heard, wait for that to
stop. A hiss means that there is
still some pressure left.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-19
5. Install the coolant recovery tank
cap and the pressure cap. After
a day or two of driving, when the
engine is cold, check the coolant
level in the recovery tank. If it is
low, refill it to the COLD
If it is decided to lift the hood, make
sure the vehicle is parked on a
level surface.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators
to warn of engine overheating.
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not,
do not continue to run the engine
and have the vehicle serviced.
There is a coolant temperature
gauge and a warning light on the
instrument panel that indicate an
overheated engine condition. See
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
on page 5‑13 and Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light on
page 5‑22.
FILL line.
If the coolant in the recovery tank is
constantly low, have a dealer
service department inspect the
vehicle for leaks.
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by
the warranty.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and
possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
In addition, there is an ENGINE
OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE and
an ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
ENGINE message displayed on the
vehicle Driver Information Center
(DIC). See Engine Cooling System
Messages on page 5‑30 for more
information.
Notice: If the engine catches fire
while driving with no coolant, the
vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on
page 10‑21 for information on
driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If it is decided not to lift the hood
when this warning appears, but
instead get service help right away,
see Roadside Assistance Program
on page 13‑7.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-20
Vehicle Care
If the overheat warning is displayed
with no sign of steam:
If Steam is Coming from the
Engine Compartment
WARNING (Continued)
1. Turn the air off.
See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on
page 10‑21 for information on
driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
WARNING
{
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Turn it off
and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait
until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off
the road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and let the
If No Steam is Coming from
the Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gauge
is no longer in the overheat zone or
an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the vehicle in
front. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
the hood.
If you keep driving when the
vehicles engine is overheated,
the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned.
Stop the engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day
.
Stops after high-speed driving
.
Idles for long periods in traffic
.
Tows a trailer
(Continued)
If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-21
If there is no sign of steam, idle the
engine for three minutes while
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down. Also, see "Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode"
in this section.
Notice: After driving in the
When to Check Power
Steering Fluid
overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool
before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely
degraded. Repair the cause of
coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless
there is a leak suspected in the
system or an unusual noise is
heard. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode
How to Check Power
Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
This emergency operating mode
allows the vehicle to be driven
to a safe place in an emergency
situation. If an overheated engine
condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates
firing groups of cylinders helps
prevent engine damage. In this
mode, a significant loss in power
and engine performance will be
noticed. The coolant temperature
gauge will indicate an overheat
condition exists. Driving
To check the power steering fluid,
do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the
engine compartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
The power steering fluid reservoir
is located toward the rear of the
engine compartment on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
dipstick with a clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
extended km (mi) and/or towing a
trailer in the overheat protection
mode should be avoided.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-22
Vehicle Care
The fluid level should be
somewhere within the
cross‐hatched area on the
dipstick. If the fluid is at the
ADD mark, fluid should be added.
below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against
freezing.
Notice:
.
When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer's instructions
for adding water.
Adding Washer Fluid
A WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
FLUID message will be displayed
on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) when windshield washer fluid
needs to be added to the vehicle.
See Washer Fluid Messages on
page 5‑36 for more information.
.
What to Use
Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
To determine what kind of fluid to
use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6. Always
use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid
may damage the vehicle and the
damages may not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the correct fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for
fluid expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage
the tank if it is
Lubricants on page 11‑6.
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
the tank is full.
Washer Fluid
completely full.
What to Use
.
Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
windshield washer system
and paint.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for more information
on location.
When the vehicle needs windshield
washer fluid, be sure to read the
manufacturer's instructions before
use. If operating the vehicle in an
area where the temperature may fall
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-23
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
Brake Adjustment
Brakes
This vehicle has disc brakes.
Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
something is wrong with the brakes.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to torque
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
new, approved replacement parts.
If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front and
rear brakes — for the worse. The
braking performance expected can
change in many other ways if the
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2.
WARNING
{
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
a crash. When the brake wear
warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced.
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal
does not return to normal height,
or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be
required.
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-24
Vehicle Care
.
A fluid leak in the brake
When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑19.
Brake Fluid
hydraulic system can also cause
a low fluid level. Have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
from a sealed container. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6.
Do not top off the brake fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
indicated on the reservoir cap. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for the location of the
reservoir.
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic
system.
.
The brake fluid level goes down
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
brake hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-25
Notice:
Vehicle Storage
WARNING
Battery
.
Using the wrong fluid can
Refer to the replacement number
shown on the original battery label
when a new battery is needed. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for battery location.
badly damage brake
{
hydraulic system parts. For
example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in the brake
hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑70 for tips on working
around a battery without
DANGER
{
Battery posts, terminals, and
getting hurt.
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
.
If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle's painted surfaces,
the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to
spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-26
Vehicle Care
3. Try to start the engine in each
gear. The vehicle should start
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
If the vehicle starts in any other
position, contact your dealer
for service.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑29.
Starter Switch Check
WARNING
{
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could
be injured.
3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition to ON/RUN, but do not
start the engine. Without
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control
Function Check
applying the regular brake,
try to move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of P (Park),
contact your dealer for service.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
WARNING
{
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could
be injured.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑29.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-27
.
To check the P (Park)
Ignition Transmission
Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
WARNING
{
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
.
The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park).
Wiper Blade Replacement
.
Windshield wiper blades should
be inspected for wear or cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 for more information on
wiper blade inspection.
The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
Replacement blades come in
different types and are removed in
different ways. Here's how to
remove the wiper blade:
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm
connector away from the
windshield.
.
To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-28
Vehicle Care
To remove and replace the wiper
blade element do the following:
4. Be sure the two wiper blade
element notches are engaged by
the last claw set, and that all the
other claws are properly
1. The wiper blade element has
two notches at one end which
are engaged by the bottom claw
set of the wiper blade. At the
notched end of the wiper blade,
pull the wiper blade element
from the wiper blade assembly.
engaged in the slots of the wiper
blade element on both sides.
2. To replace the element, start at
the heel end of the wiper blade,
which is the end nearest to the
base of the wiper arm, and
slide the wiper blade element,
notched end last, into the
2. While holding the wiper arm,
pull the clip up from the blade
connecting point, and pull the
blade assembly down toward the
windshield to remove it from the
wiper arm.
wiper blade claw sets.
3. To engage the last claw into the
notched end of the wiper blade
element, squeeze the wiper
blade element at the notched
area, and push the wiper blade
element so the claw fits into
the notch.
3. Install the new wiper blade onto
the wiper arm and snap the clip
down into place.
A. Correct Installation
B. Incorrect Installation
For the proper type and size of
windshield wiper blades, see
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 11‑8.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-29
Halogen Bulbs
Headlamp Aiming
Bulb Replacement
Headlamp aim has been preset at
the factory and should need no
further adjustment.
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 10‑33.
WARNING
{
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.
However, if the vehicle is damaged
in a crash, the headlamp aim may
be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be
necessary if oncoming drivers flash
their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
For any bulb‐changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
If the headlamps need to be
re-aimed, it is recommended that
the vehicle be taken to the dealer
for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-30
Vehicle Care
To replace one of these bulbs:
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal, Sidemarker, and
Parking Lamps
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑5.
3. Pull up on the plastic headlamp
retainer and remove it.
4. Pull the headlamp assembly
away from the vehicle and
remove the electrical connector.
2. Remove the screw from the
headlamp assembly.
A. Sidemarker
5. Remove the round dust caps to
gain access to the bulbs.
B. Low-Beam Headlamp
C. High-Beam Headlamp
D. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
6. Turn the old bulb
counterclockwise and remove it
from the retaining ring by pulling
it away from the headlamp.
7. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by raising the lock
tab and pulling the connector
away from the bulb's base.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-31
8. Install the electrical connector to
the bulb.
9. Install the new bulb by inserting
the smallest tab on the bulb
base into the matching notch in
the retaining ring. Turn the bulb
a quarter-turn clockwise until it
stops.
10. Reinstall the dust caps.
12. Push down on the plastic
headlamp retainer to reinstall it.
13. Reinstall the screw from the
headlamp assembly.
11. Push the headlamp assembly
toward the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-32
Vehicle Care
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps
3. Turn the upper wing nut
5. Turn the two hex nuts
counterclockwise to
remove them.
counterclockwise and remove it.
4. Pull the carpet away from the
rear of the vehicle.
6. Pull out the taillamp assembly
and disconnect the wiring
harness.
A. Rear Sidemarker Lamp
B. Back-up Lamp
7. Turn the bulb socket
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal
To replace one of these bulbs:
counterclockwise to remove it.
8. Pull the old bulb straight out to
remove it.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2‑10.
9. Push the new bulb straight in
until it clicks to install it.
2. Remove the convenience net
(if equipped). Unhook the net
from the upper wing nut.
10. Reverse steps 1 through 7 to
reinstall.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-33
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
Replacement Bulbs
Electrical System
Exterior Lamp
Bulb
Number
Electrical System
Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
1. Turn the lamp assembly
counterclockwise and pull the
lamp assembly out of the
connector.
Back-Up
921LL
Front Parking/
Turn Signal
3157NAK
194ll
2. Pull the old bulb from the lamp
assembly, keeping the bulb
straight as you pull it out.
License
Plate Lamp
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed.
This greatly reduces the chance of
circuit overload and fire caused by
electrical problems.
Headlamps
High-Beam
Low-Beam
Sidemarker
3. Install the new bulb.
H9
H11
4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall the license plate lamp.
194LL
Stoplamp,
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
the following in the vehicle:
Taillamp, and
Turn Signal
3057
.
Headlamp Wiring
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer.
.
Windshield Wiper Motor
.
Power Windows and Other
Power Accessories
Replace a bad fuse with a new one
of the identical size and rating.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-34
Vehicle Care
If there is a problem on the road and
a fuse needs to be replaced, the
same amperage fuse can be
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the
windshield wipers.
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
The Engine Compartment Fuse
Block is in the engine compartment.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for more information
on location.
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical
problems.
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have the
headlamp wiring checked right away
if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
Windshield Wipers
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Look at the silver-colored band
inside the fuse. If the band is broken
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-35
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Center
High‐Mounted
Air Conditioning
Compressor
A/C CMPRSR
CHMSL/
BCK‐UP
Stoplamp,
Back‐up Lamp
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
Motor 1
ABS MTR 1
DISPLAY
DRL 1
Display
ABS MTR 2
AIR PUMP
ABS Motor 2
Air Pump
Daytime Running
Lamps 1
Daytime Running
Lamps 2
Air Injection
Reactor Solenoid
DRL 2
AIR SOL
Engine Control
Module (ECM),
Ignition
AIRBAG/
DISPLAY
Airbag,
Display
ECM IGN
AUX PWR
BATT 1
BATT 2
BATT 3
BATT 4
Auxiliary Power
Battery 1
ECM,
Transmission
Control
ECM/TCM
Battery 2
Module (TCM)
Battery 3
EMISSIONS 1 Emissions 1
EMISSIONS 2 Emissions 2
Electronic
Battery 4
Body Control
Module (BCM)
BCM
ETC/ECM
Throttle
The vehicle may not have all of the
fuses, relays, and features shown.
Control, ECM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-36
Vehicle Care
Fuses
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Fog Lamps
Fuses
LT PARK
LT SPOT
LT T/SIG
ONSTAR
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Regulated
Voltage Control
FAN 1
FAN 2
Driver Side
Parking Lamp
RVC SEN
Sensor
Left Spot
FOG LAMPS
STRG WHL
STRTR
TRANS
WPR
Steering Wheel
Starter
(If Equipped)
Driver Side Turn
Signal Lamp
OnStar®
FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump
Transmission
Wiper
Headlamp
HDLP MDL
Module
PWR DROP/ Power Drop,
CRANK
Crank
HORN
Horn
WSW
Windshield Wiper
RADIO
Audio System
HTD MIR
INJ 1
Heated Mirror
Injector 1
Relay
Usage
Passenger Side
RT HI BEAM High‐Beam
A/C
CMPRSR
Air Conditioning
Compressor
INJ 2
Injector 2
Headlamp
INT LIGHTS
Interior Lamps
Passenger Side
RT LO BEAM Low‐Beam
FAN 1
FAN 2
FAN 3
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 3
Interior Lamps,
Instrument Panel
Dimmer
INT LTS/
PNL DIM
Headlamp
Passenger Side
Parking Lamp
RT PARK
RT SPOT
RT T/SIG
FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump
Driver Side
High‐Beam
Headlamp
LT HI BEAM
Right Spot
PWR/TRN
Powertrain
Rear Defogger
Starter
Passenger Side
Turn Signal Lamp
REAR
DEFOG
Driver Side
LT LO BEAM Low‐Beam
STRTR
Headlamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-37
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
Fuses
DR/LCK
Usage
Door Locks
HTD/SEAT
PWR/MIR
PWR/SEAT
Heated Seats
Power Mirrors
Power Seats
PWR/WNDW Power Window
Retained
RAP
Accessory
Power
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
S/ROOF
TRUNK
TRUNK
XM
Sunroof
Trunk
Fuses
AIRBAG
Usage
Airbags
Trunk Relay
XM™ Radio
The fuse block is on the passenger
side of the vehicle in the carpet
molding. Remove the fuse block
door to access the fuses.
AMP
Amplifier
AUX
Auxiliary Outlets
Canister
CNSTR
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-38
Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
.
.
Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer. If you
ever have questions about your
tire warranty and where to
obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details.
For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
.
.
.
Overloading your tires can
cause overheating as a result
of too much flexing. You
could have a blowout and a
serious accident. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
Worn or old tires can cause a
crash. If your tread is badly
worn, replace them.
Replace any tires that have
been damaged by impacts
with potholes, curbs, etc.
.
Under inflated tires pose the
same danger as overloaded
tires. The resulting crash
could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your
tires are cold.
Improperly repaired tires can
cause a crash. Only your
dealer or an authorized tire
service center should repair,
replace, dismount, and mount
the tires.
.
Do not spin the tires in
excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
on slippery surfaces such as
snow, mud, ice, etc.
Excessive spinning may
cause the tires to explode.
.
Over inflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
or broken by a sudden
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-39
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this Number (TIN). The TIN shows
section for more detail.
code is the Tire Identification
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is
molded into its sidewall. The
examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a
compact spare tire sidewall.
the manufacturer and plant
code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(B) TPC Spec
(Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
GM's TPC specifications meet or the sidewall and under the tread.
exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
(C) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
manufacturers are required to
grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with
the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a
combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
Grading on page 10‑55.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load that
can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
(D) Tire Identification
Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following the DOT
(Department of Transportation)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-40
Vehicle Care
regular road tire has lost air and
gone flat. If your vehicle has a
compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on
page 10‑68 andIf a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑59.
(E) Tire Inflation: The
temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to
420 kPa (60 psi). For more
information on tire pressure and
inflation see Tire Pressure on
page 10‑44.
(C) Tire Identification
Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following the DOT
(Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant
code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of
letters and numbers define a
tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) TPC Spec
(B) Temporary Use Only: The
compact spare tire or temporary
use tire has a tread life of
(Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
approximately 5 000 km
(3,000 miles) and should not be
driven at speeds over 105 km/h
(65 mph). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-41
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
number that indicates the tire
height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
Tire Designations
Tire Size
The following illustration shows
an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
(D) Construction Code: A
letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted‐bias
ply construction.
outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal).
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to
Accessory Weight: This
means the combined weight
of optional accessories.
Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic
transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
standards set by the
U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(F) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carrying capacity a tire
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
sidewall to sidewall.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-42
Vehicle Care
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between
the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
and coolant, but without
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the front axle.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12 .
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the rear axle.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12.
passengers and cargo.
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
DOT Markings: A code molded
into the sidewall of a tire
signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
Intended Outboard Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at
alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal)
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 10‑44.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑12.
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-43
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Maximum Load Rating: The
load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
Speed Rating: An
alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑44
andVehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with
the road.
Occupant Distribution:
Designated seating positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-44
Vehicle Care
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the
tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm
(1/16 inch) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 10‑52.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The
number of designated seating
positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12.
Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of
air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell
you that under‐inflation or
over‐inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have
enough air (under‐inflation),
you can get the following:
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards): A tire
information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a
tire's traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire
manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on
.
Tire overloading and
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle's
capacity weight and the original
equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure.
See “Tire and Loading
over-heating which could
lead to a blowout.
.
Premature or
irregular wear.
.
Poor handling.
.
Reduced fuel economy.
Information Label” under Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
page 10‑55.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-45
If your tires have too much
air (over‐inflation), you can
get the following:
For additional information
regarding how much weight your
vehicle can carry, and an
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure.
You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they are under‐inflated. Check
the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12 . How
you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle
with more weight than it was
designed to carry.
.
Unusual wear.
.
Poor handling.
.
Rough ride.
.
Needless damage from
road hazards.
A vehicle-specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to your vehicle. This
label shows your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the
label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support
your vehicle's maximum load
carrying capacity.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month
or more. Do not forget to check
the compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one. The compact
spare should be at 420 kPa
(60 psi). For additional
information regarding the
compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on
page 10‑68.
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-46
Vehicle Care
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
Please note that the TPMS is
not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
If you overfill the tire, release
air by pushing on the metal stem
in the center of the tire valve.
Re‐check the tire pressure with
the tire gauge.
Be sure to put the valve caps
back on the valve stems. They
help prevent leaks by keeping
out dirt and moisture.
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly
under‐inflated.
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your tires and
transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare
When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
stopping ability.
signal low tire pressure as intended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-47
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check
the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
inflate the tires to the recommended
pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire
and wheel assembly. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in
the vehicle's tires and transmit the
tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
At the same time, a message to
check the pressure in a specific tire
appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. The low tire
pressure warning light and the DIC
warning message come on at each
ignition cycle until the tires are
inflated to the correct inflation
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑47 for
additional information.
pressure. Using the DIC, tire
pressure levels can be viewed by
the driver. For additional information
and details about the DIC operation
and displays, see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑24 and Tire
Messages on page 5‑34.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑17 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This
could be an early indicator that the
air pressure in the tire(s) is getting
low and needs to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument panel
cluster. If the warning light comes
on, stop as soon as possible and
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-48
Vehicle Care
A Tire and Loading Information
label, attached to your vehicle,
shows the size of your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle's tires when they are cold.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12, for an example of the
Tire and Loading Information label
and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Tire Pressure on
Notice: Tire sealant materials are
not all the same. A non-approved
tire sealant could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage
caused by using an incorrect tire
sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use only
the GM approved tire sealant
available through your dealer or
included in the vehicle.
TPMS Malfunction Light and
Message
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire pressure warning light
flashes for about one minute and
then stays on for the remainder of
the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low
tire pressure warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each
ignition cycle until the problem is
corrected. Some of the conditions
that can cause the malfunction light
and DIC message to come on are:
page 10‑44.
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you
about a low tire pressure condition
but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 10‑51, Tire Rotation on
page 10‑51, and Tires on
.
One of the road tires has been
page 10‑38.
replaced with the spare tire.
The spare tire does not have a
TPMS sensor. The TPMS
malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you
re‐install the road tire containing
the TPMS sensor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-49
.
.
The TPMS sensor matching
process was started but not
completed or not completed
successfully after rotating the
vehicle's tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light
should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is
performed successfully. See
“TPMS Sensor Matching
Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to
the TPMS could cause the
The TPMS sensors can also be
matched to each tire/wheel position
by increasing or decreasing the
tire's air pressure. If increasing the
tire's air pressure, do not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure
indicated on the tire's sidewall.
TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it
cannot detect or signal a low tire
condition. See your dealer for
service if the TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message come on
and stay on.
To decrease air pressure out of a
tire you can use the pointed end of
the valve cap, a pencil-style air
pressure gauge, or a key.
Process” later in this section.
.
One or more TPMS sensors are
missing or damaged. The DIC
message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off
when the TPMS sensors are
installed and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See your dealer
for service.
TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
You have two minutes to match the
first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer
than two minutes to match the first
tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire
and wheel positions, the matching
process stops and you need to
start over.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. Any time you
rotate your vehicle's tires or replace
one or more of the TPMS sensors,
the identification codes will need to
be matched to the new tire/wheel
position. The sensors are matched
to the tire/wheel positions in the
following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.
See your dealer for service.
.
Replacement tires or wheels do
not match your vehicle's original
equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those
recommended for your vehicle
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 10‑53.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-50
Vehicle Care
The TPMS sensor matching process
is outlined below:
5. Remove the valve cap from the
valve cap stem. Activate the
TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure
for five seconds, or until a
8. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure
in Step 5. The horn sounds
two times to indicate the sensor
identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear
tire, and the TPMS sensor
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/
RUN with the engine off.
horn chirp sounds. The horn
chirp, which may take up to
30 seconds to sound, confirms
that the sensor identification
code has been matched to this
tire and wheel position.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter's lock and
unlock buttons at the same time
for approximately five seconds.
The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode
and the TIRE LEARNING
matching process is no longer
active. The TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message on the
DIC display screen goes off.
6. Proceed to the passenger side
front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
9. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF.
ACTIVE message displays on
the DIC screen.
10. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
7. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire, and repeat the
4. Start with the driver side
front tire.
procedure in Step 5.
11. Put the valve caps back on the
valve stems.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-51
.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon as
possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for
Tire Inspection
We recommend that you
regularly inspect your vehicle's
tires, including the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, for signs
of wear or damage at least once
a month.
The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot
be repaired well because of
the size or location of the
damage.
damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 10‑52 and Wheel
Replacement on page 10‑57.
Always remove the tires if any of
the following statements
are true:
Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km (7,500 miles). See
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 .
.
You can see the indicators at
three or more places around
the tire.
The purpose of a regular tire
rotation is to achieve a uniform
wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle
continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.
.
You can see cord or fabric
showing through the tire's
rubber.
.
The tread or sidewall is
cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or
fabric.
When rotating the vehicle's tires,
always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact
spare tire in the tire rotation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-52
Vehicle Care
After the tires have been
When It Is Time for
New Tires
WARNING (Continued)
rotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑44 and Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12.
When changing a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where
the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑59.
Various factors, such as
maintenance, temperatures, driving
speeds, vehicle loading, and road
conditions influence when you need
new tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on
page 10‑47.
Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See
“Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
Lightly coat the center of the
wheel hub with wheel bearing
grease after a wheel change or
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
or rust build-up. Do not get
grease on the flat wheel
WARNING
{
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.
One way to tell when it is time for
new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which appear when the
tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or
less of tread remaining.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-53
See Tire Inspection on page 10‑51
and Tire Rotation on page 10‑51 for
additional information.
Parking for an extended period can
cause flat spots on the tires that
may result in vibrations while
driving. When storing a vehicle for
at least a month, remove the tires or
raise the vehicle to reduce the
weight from the tires.
This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the
original tires.
The rubber in tires ages over time.
This is also true for the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
not being used. Multiple conditions
affect how fast this aging takes
place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation
pressure maintenance. Tires will
typically need to be replaced due to
wear before they may need to be
replaced due to age. Consult the tire
manufacturer for more information
on when tires should be replaced.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec
Buying New Tires
system considers over a dozen
critical specifications that impact
the overall performance of your
vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for your vehicle.
The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it
was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires
with the same TPC Spec rating.
pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's
sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all‐season tread
design, the TPC Spec number
will be followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire
Vehicle Storage
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
a vehicle that will be stored for at
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
area away from direct sunlight to
slow aging. This area should be
free of grease, gasoline, or
Sidewall Labeling on page 10‑39
for additional information.
other substances that can
deteriorate rubber.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-54
Vehicle Care
GM recommends replacing tires
in sets of four. This is because
uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle
performing most like it did when
the tires were new. Replacing
less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle.
See Tire Inspection on
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Mixing tires could cause you
to lose control while driving.
If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have
a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to your
vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type
of tires on all wheels. It is all
right to drive with your
If you use bias-ply tires on the
vehicle, the wheel rim flanges
could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail
suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
page 10‑51 and Tire Rotation on
page 10‑51 for information on
proper tire rotation.
If you must replace your
vehicle's tires with those that do
not have a TPC Spec number,
make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and
bias‐belted tires) as your
WARNING
{
Tires could explode during
improper service. You or others
could be injured or killed if you
attempt to mount or dismount a
tire. Only your dealer or an
authorized tire service center
should mount and dismount
the tires.
compact spare temporarily, as
it was developed for use on
your vehicle. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 10‑68.
vehicle's original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire
pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
low‐pressure warning if
non‐TPC Spec rated tires are
installed on your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-55
Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as antilock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and electronic stability
control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
Non‐TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low‐pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the
proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10‑46.
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
WARNING
{
Your vehicle's original
If you add different sized wheels,
your vehicle may not provide
an acceptable level of
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑12 for more
information about the Tire and
Loading Information label and its
location on your vehicle.
The following information
relates to the system developed
by the United States National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA),
which grades tires
performance and safety if tires
not recommended for those
wheels are selected. You may
increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury.
Only use GM specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified
technician.
Different Size Tires and
Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a
different size than your original
equipment wheels and tires, this
could affect the way your vehicle
performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics,
by treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance.
See Buying New Tires on
page 10‑53 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑3 for
additional information.
stability, and resistance to rollover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-56
Vehicle Care
This applies only to vehicles
sold in the United States. The
grades are molded on the
sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG) system does
not apply to deep tread,
All Passenger Car Tires Must
Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test
course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in
winter-type snow tires,
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they
must also conform to federal
safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
driving habits, service practices
and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-57
Temperature – A, B, C
properly inflated and not
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it,
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade
C corresponds to a level of
performance which all
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
Wheel Alignment and Tire except some aluminum wheels,
Balance
which can sometimes be repaired.
See your dealer if any of these
conditions exist.
The tires and wheels on the vehicle
were aligned and balanced carefully
at the factory to give the longest tire
life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and
tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if there
is unusual tire wear or the vehicle
pulls to one side or the other, the
alignment should be checked. If the
vehicle vibrates when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See
your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Your dealer will know the kind of
wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-58
Vehicle Care
If you need to replace any of the
wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,
or Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) sensors, replace them only
with new GM original equipment
parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for
the vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire
or tire chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
Tire Chains
WARNING
{
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑59 for more information.
WARNING
{
Used Replacement Wheels
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air
and make you lose control. You
could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
WARNING
{
Putting a used wheel on the
vehicle is dangerous. You cannot
know how it has been used or
how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause a
crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-59
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop, well off the
road, if possible.
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Have your dealer or an authorized
tire service center repair or
replace the flat tire as soon
as possible.
To help avoid damage to the
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust
or remove the device if it is
contacting the vehicle, and do not
spin the vehicle's wheels. If you
do find traction devices that will
fit, install them on the front tires.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear
blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you
can still steer. Gently brake to a
stop, well off the road, if possible.
WARNING
{
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs is
dangerous without the
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while you are driving, especially if
you maintain your vehicle's tires
properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
WARNING
{
Driving on a flat tire will cause
permanent damage to the tire.
Re-inflating a tire after it has been
driven on while severely
under-inflated or flat may cause a
blowout and a serious crash.
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
that has been driven on while
severely under-inflated or flat.
blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-60
Vehicle Care
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place, well off the road,
if possible. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
WARNING (Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
WARNING
{
To be certain the vehicle will not
move, put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from
the one being changed. That
would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of
the vehicle.
Changing a tire can be
dangerous. The vehicle can slip
off the jack and roll over or fall on
you or other people. You and they
could be badly injured or even
killed. Find a level place to
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire.
change your tire. To help prevent
the vehicle from moving:
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic
transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse).
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-61
5. Remove the compact spare tire.
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
The equipment you will need is
located in the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2‑10.
2. Remove the convenience net if
the vehicle has one.
3. Remove the spare tire cover.
The tools you will need to change a
tire include the jack (A), extension
and protection guide (B), and wheel
wrench (C).
6. Turn the nut holding the jack
counterclockwise and remove it.
Then remove the jack and
wrench.
4. Turn the wing nut
counterclockwise and remove it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-62
Vehicle Care
If needed, finish loosening them
with your fingers. The plastic nut
caps will not come off.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
This vehicle may have aluminum
wheels with exposed wheel nuts.
Use the wheel wrench to loosen all
the wheel nuts. Do not remove
them yet.
If needed, use the flat end of the
wheel wrench and pry along the
edge of the cover until it comes off.
The edge of the wheel cover could
be sharp, so do not try to remove it
with your bare hands. Do not drop
the cover or lay it face down, as it
could become scratched or
Or, this vehicle may have steel
wheels with plastic covers.
damaged. Store the wheel cover in
the trunk until the flat tire is repaired
or replaced.
2. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise once on each
wheel nut to loosen it. Do not
remove them yet.
Once you have removed the wheel
cover, use the following procedure
to remove the flat tire and install the
spare tire.
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑59.
To remove the plastic covers and
wheel nut caps, loosen the plastic
nut caps with the wheel wrench in a
counterclockwise direction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-63
4. Put the compact spare tire
near you.
WARNING
{
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs is
dangerous without the
WARNING
{
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack you could
be badly injured or killed. Never
get under a vehicle when it is
supported only by a jack.
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
3. For all wheel types, find the
jacking location using the
diagram above and the
WARNING
{
corresponding jacking notches
located on the bottom side of the
plastic molding. The notches in
the plastic molding are marked
with a triangle shape to help you
find them.
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
The front location is about
17.7 cm (7.0 in) from the rear
edge of the front wheel well. The
rear location is about 11.4 cm
(4.5 in) from the front edge of the
rear wheel well.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-64
Vehicle Care
WARNING
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑59.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the
jack handle clockwise. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the
ground to install the compact
spare tire.
7. Remove any rust or dirt from the
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces,
and spare wheel.
8. Install the compact spare tire.
6. Remove all wheel nuts and the
flat tire.
WARNING
{
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-65
WARNING
{
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
9. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the
rounded end of the nuts toward
the wheel. Tighten each nut
clockwise by hand until the
10. Lower the vehicle by
turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
Specifications on page 12‑2 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Lower the jack completely.
wheel is held against the hub.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-66
Vehicle Care
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage. To
avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
on your vehicle's compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or
the spare could be damaged.
When storing a full-size tire, use the
extension with the extension
protector, located in the foam
holder, to help avoid wheel surface
damage.
To store a full-size tire:
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
1. Install the tools in their original
location in the trunk area and
secure.
WARNING
{
2. Place the tire valve stem facing
down and the protector/guide
placed through a wheel bolt hole
and threaded onto the bolt
screw.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
3. Remove the protector and attach
the retainer securely
4. Store the cover as far forward as
possible.
After the compact spare tire has
been installed on the vehicle, store
the flat tire in the trunk.
11. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
in a crisscross sequence
as shown.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-67
When storing a compact spare tire
in the trunk, put the protector back
in the foam holder.
A. Cover
B. Retainer
C. Compact Spare Tire
D. Wing Nut
The compact spare is for temporary
use only. Replace the compact
spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 10‑68. Use this
as a guide for storing the compact
spare tire and tools.
E. Jack
F. Wheel Wrench
G. Extension Protector
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw
Compact Spare Tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-68
Vehicle Care
A. Retainer
Compact Spare Tire
B. Full-Size Flat Tire
C. Protective Guide
D. Extension Bolt Screw
E. Wing Nut
WARNING
{
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
F. Jack
G. Wheel Wrench
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw
Full-Size Flat Tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-69
Although the compact spare tire
was fully inflated when the
vehicle was new, it can lose air
after a time. Check the inflation
pressure regularly. It should be
420 kPa (60 psi).
compact spare. See Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 10‑46.
The system may not work correctly
when the compact spare is installed
on the vehicle. Of course, it's best to
replace the spare with a full-size tire
as soon as you can. The spare will
last longer and be in good shape in
case you need it again.
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare
tire or wheel with other wheels or
tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
After installing the compact spare
on the vehicle, you should stop as
soon as possible and make sure
the spare tire is correctly inflated.
The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to
105 km/h (65 mph) for distances up
to 5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you
can finish your trip and have the
full-size tire repaired or replaced
where you want. You must calibrate
the tire inflation monitor system
after installing or removing the
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
compact spare. Using them can
damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too.
Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare.
Notice: When the compact spare
is installed, do not take the
vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The
compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel and other parts of the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-70
Vehicle Care
Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to
the vehicle that would not be
covered by the warranty.
2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can reach,
but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they are,
it could cause a ground
Jump Starting
For more information about the
vehicle battery, see Battery on
page 10‑25.
Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not
work, and it could damage
the vehicle.
connection you do not want. You
would not be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical
systems.
If your vehicle's battery has run
down, you may want to use another
vehicle and some jumper cables to
start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12‐volt battery with a
negative ground system.
To avoid the possibility of the
vehicles rolling, set the parking
brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start
procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in
WARNING
{
Notice: If the other vehicle's
system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only
use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump
start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
.
They contain acid that can
burn you.
N (Neutral) before setting the
parking brake.
.
They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
Notice: If you leave the radio or
other accessories on during the
jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the
radio and other accessories
when jump starting the vehicle.
.
They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-71
3. Turn off the ignition on both
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory
power outlets. Turn off the radio
and all lamps that are not
WARNING
{
Using an open flame near a
battery can cause battery gas to
explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you
need more light.
needed. This will avoid sparks
and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that
first. If you do not, explosive gas
could be present.
4. Open the hoods and locate the
batteries. Find the positive (+)
and negative (−) terminal
To uncover the remote
locations on each vehicle.
positive (+) terminal, remove
the fuse block cover. You
should always use the remote
positive (+) terminal instead
of the positive (+) terminal on
the battery.
You will not need to access your
battery for jump starting. Your
vehicle has a remote positive (+)
jump starting terminal for that
purpose. The remote positive (+)
terminal is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger
side of the vehicle, on the
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
WARNING
{
underhood fuse block. See
Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for more
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
information on location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-72
Vehicle Care
WARNING
Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−), or you will get a
short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts
too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the
dead battery because this can
cause sparks.
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to the
{
negative (−) terminal location of
the vehicle with the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step. The
other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or
to a remote negative (−) terminal
on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
5. Check that the jumper cables
do not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
location of the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
Before you connect the cables,
here are some basic things you
should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch
metal. Connect it to the
9. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) cable at least 45 cm
(18 in) away from the dead
positive (+) terminal location of
the vehicle with the good battery.
Use a remote positive (+)
battery, but not near engine
parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there,
and the chance of sparks getting
back to the battery is much less.
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-73
10. Now start the vehicle with the
good battery and run the
engine for a while.
To disconnect the jumper cables
from both vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead
battery.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
2. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or
other metal.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
Part or Remote Negative (−)
Terminal
5. Return the fuse block cover to its
original position.
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-74
Vehicle Care
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle such as a motor home. The
two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are
known as dinghy towing and dolly
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground. Dolly towing is towing the
vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Towing
Towing the Vehicle
.
What is the towing capacity
Notice: To avoid damage, the
disabled vehicle should be
towed with all four wheels off the
ground. Care must be taken with
vehicles that have low ground
clearance and/or special
equipment.
of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle
manufacturer's
recommendations.
.
What is the distance that will be
travelled? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
Consult your dealer or a
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 13‑7.
.
.
Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your
dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes,
such as behind a motor home, see
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in
this section.
equipment recommendations.
Is the vehicle ready to be
towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make
sure the vehicle is prepared to
be towed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-75
5. Use an adequate clamping
device designed for towing to
ensure that the front wheels are
locked into the straight position.
Dinghy Towing
Dolly Towing
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
following the manufacturer's
instructions.
7. Release the parking brake only
after the vehicle being towed is
firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
and remove the key.
Notice: If the vehicle is
Use the following procedure to dolly
tow the vehicle from the front:
towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain
components could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions.
Do not tow the vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the
dolly.
The vehicle was not designed to be
towed with all four wheels on the
ground. If the vehicle must be
towed, a dolly should be used.
See “Dolly Towing” that follows for
more information.
3. Shift the transmission to
P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-76
Vehicle Care
or damage may occur and it
would not be covered by the
warranty.
High pressure car washes may
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the
surface of the vehicle. Use of power
washers exceeding 8 274 kPa
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight. Use a car washing soap.
Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain
acid or abrasives, as they can
damage the paint, metal or plastic
on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer. Follow all manufacturers'
directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety
If dirt and/or contaminants build up
in the glass seals, use a cloth and
water to clean the glass seals.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
During very cold, damp weather
frequent application may be
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth and a car washing soap to
clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under
required. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑6.
precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product.
“Washing the Vehicle.”
Washing the Vehicle
Finish Care
The best way to preserve the
vehicle's finish is to keep it clean by
washing it often.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of the vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from
your dealer.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain
chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on the
vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on the vehicle
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and
water spotting.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-77
Always use waxes and polishes that
are non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather and
chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To help
keep the paint finish looking new,
keep the vehicle garaged or
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.
Notice: Machine compounding
or aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint
free cloth or paper towel soaked
with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
if they are worn or damaged.
covered whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright
Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be
cleaned regularly to keep their
luster. Washing with water is all that
is usually needed. However, chrome
polish may be used on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Foreign materials such as calcium
chloride and other salts, ice melting
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe
for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.
Extreme dusty conditions
Use special care with aluminum
trim. To avoid damaging protective
trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to
clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright
metal parts.
.
Sand and salt
.
Heat and sun
.
Snow and ice, without proper
removal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-78
Vehicle Care
The surface of these wheels is
similar to the painted surface of the
vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because they could
Aluminum Wheels
Tires
Notice: Using strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use only approved
cleaners on aluminum or
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush
with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.
damage the surface. Do not use
chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Driving the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
chrome-plated wheels.
Sheet Metal Damage
Keep the wheels clean using a soft,
clean cloth with mild soap and
water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft
clean towel. A wax may then be
applied.
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using chrome polish on
aluminum wheels could damage
the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-79
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody with
plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt
packed in close areas of the frame
should be loosened before being
flushed. Your dealer or an
Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before
being flushed. Your dealer or an
underbody car washing system
can do this.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be
corrected in your dealer's body and
paint shop.
underbody car washing system can
do this.
Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Although no defect in the paint job
causes this, we will repair, at no
charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this
fallout condition within 12 months or
20 000 km (12,000 miles) of
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody with
plain water. Clean any areas
where mud and debris can collect.
purchase, whichever occurs first.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-80
Vehicle Care
surfaces for which they were not
intended. Apply the cleaner directly
to the cleaning cloth to prevent
over-spray. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces
immediately.
Do not clean the interior using the
following cleaners or techniques:
Interior Care
The vehicle's interior will continue to
look its best if it is cleaned often.
Dust and dirt can accumulate on the
upholstery and cause damage to
the carpet, fabric, leather, and
plastic surfaces. Stains should be
removed quickly as extreme heat
could cause them to set rapidly.
.
Never use a knife or any other
sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
.
Never use a stiff brush. It can
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces on
the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the
rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
.
Never apply heavy pressure or
Lighter colored interiors may require
more frequent cleaning.
Newspapers and garments that can
transfer color to home furnishings
can also transfer color to the
vehicle's interior.
rub aggressively with a cleaning
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.
Cleaners can contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the
vehicle's interior. Before using
cleaners, read and adhere to all
safety instructions on the label.
While cleaning the vehicle's interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by
opening the vehicle's doors and
windows.
.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Remove dust from small buttons
and knobs with a small brush with
soft bristles.
Avoid laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much
soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
water is a good guide.
Your dealer has products for
cleaning the vehicle's interior. When
cleaning the vehicle's interior, only
use cleaners specifically designed
for the surfaces that are being
cleaned. Permanent damage can
result from using cleaners on
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-81
.
.
Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery while cleaning.
Your dealer has products for
cleaning the vehicle's interior. When
cleaning the vehicle's interior, only
use cleaners specifically designed
for the surfaces that are being
cleaned. Permanent damage can
result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not
intended. Apply the cleaner directly
to the cleaning cloth to prevent
over-spray. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces
immediately.
maintain adequate ventilation
by opening the vehicle's doors
and windows.
Damage to the vehicle's interior
may result from the use of many
organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Do not clean the interior using the
following cleaners or techniques:
.
Never use a knife or any other
The vehicle's interior will continue to
look its best if it is cleaned often.
Dust and dirt can accumulate on the
upholstery and cause damage to
the carpet, fabric, leather, and
plastic surfaces. Stains should be
removed quickly as extreme heat
could cause them to set rapidly.
sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
.
Never use a stiff brush. It can
cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
.
Never apply heavy pressure or
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces on
the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the
rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and
rub aggressively with a cleaning
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.
Lighter colored interiors may require
more frequent cleaning.
Newspapers and garments that can
transfer color to home furnishings
can also transfer color to the
vehicle's interior.
.
Use only mild, neutral‐pH soaps.
Avoid laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
glass cleaner.
Remove dust from small buttons
and knobs with a small brush with
soft bristles.
Cleaners can contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the
vehicle's interior. Before using
cleaners, read and adhere to all
safety instructions on the label.
While cleaning the vehicle's interior,
degreasers. Using too much
soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
water is a good guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-82
Vehicle Care
.
Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery while cleaning.
To clean:
A paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture from the fabric or
carpet after the cleaning process.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
cloth with water or club soda.
.
Do not use organic solvents
such as naptha, alcohol, etc.
Damage to the vehicle's interior
may result.
Leather
2. Remove excess moisture.
Leather, and lighter colored leather
in particular, will need more frequent
cleaning to prevent the buildup of
dust, dirt, and colors transferred
from other items so that these do
not become permanent stains.
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
brush attachment to remove dust
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
with a beater bar in the nozzle may
only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils,
always try to remove them first with
plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of
the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
4. Continue to gently rub the
soiled area.
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can be
used. Your dealer has a GM
approved leather cleaner available
that provides superior cleaning
performance when used regularly
on finished automotive leathers.
Allow the leather to dry naturally.
Do not use heat, steam, spot lifters
or spot removers, or shoe polish on
leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain
water.
If any of the soil remains, a
.
commercial fabric cleaner or spot
lifter may be necessary. Test a small
hidden area for colorfastness before
using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression
that a ring formation may result,
clean the entire surface.
For liquids: gently blot the
remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no
more can be removed.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-83
permanently change the
commercial cleaners and coatings
that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the
appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended.
Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the
vehicle's interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Care of Safety Belts
appearance and feel of the leather
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the vehicle's interior
because they can alter the
Keep belts clean and dry.
WARNING
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner
Instrument Panel, Vinyl and
other Plastic Surfaces
To remove dust, a soft cloth
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or
removers on plastic surfaces. Many
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-84
Vehicle Care
Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
Removing and Replacing the
Floor Mat
Floor Mats
.
The original equipment floor
WARNING
{
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the accelerator or
brake pedal. Always check that
the floor mats do not interfere
with the pedals.
If a floor mat is the wrong size or
is not properly installed, it can
interfere with the accelerator
pedal and/or brake pedal.
Interference with the pedals can
cause unintended acceleration
and/or increased stopping
distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
accelerator or brake pedal.
.
Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
The driver side floor mat is held in
place by one hook-type retainer.
.
Do not place anything on top of
1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to
remove it from the hooks.
the driver side floor mat.
.
Use only a single floor mat on
2. Reinstall the floor mat by lining
up the openings on the floor mat
over the hooks and push it down
into position.
the driver side.
.
Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
3. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
accelerator or brake pedals.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-1
Please read the information under
Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see
your dealer.
General Information
Notice: Maintenance intervals,
checks, inspections,
Service and
Maintenance
recommended fluids, and
The maintenance schedule is for
vehicles that:
lubricants are necessary to keep
this vehicle in good working
condition. Damage caused by
failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
.
Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑12.
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
As the vehicle owner, you are
responsible for the scheduled
maintenance in this section. We
recommend having your dealer
perform these services. Proper
vehicle maintenance helps to keep
the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions for
better air quality.
.
Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
.
Use the recommended fuel.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑35.
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9
Because of all the different ways
people use vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-2
Service and Maintenance
The proper replacement parts,
Scheduled
Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil
Soon Message Displays
WARNING
{
fluids, and lubricants to use are
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6 and
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 11‑8. We recommend the use
of genuine parts from your dealer.
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous. Some jobs can
cause serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how and
the proper tools and equipment.
If in doubt, see your dealer to
have a qualified technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own
Change engine oil and filter.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
An Emission Control Service.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and
performance of the vehicle, it is
important that the first rotation
service for new tires be performed.
Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire
Rotation on page 10‑51.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message displays, service is
required for the vehicle as soon as
possible, within the next 1 000 km/
600 miles. If driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system
might not indicate the need for
vehicle service for more than a year.
The engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and
the oil life system must be reset.
Your dealer has trained service
technicians who will perform this
work and reset the system. If the
engine oil life system is reset
Service Work on page 10‑4.
At your dealer, you can be certain
that you will receive the highest
level of service available. Your
dealer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine
replacement parts, as well as,
up‐to‐date tools and equipment to
ensure fast and accurate
diagnostics.
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles
since the last service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-3
.
Body hinges and latches, key
lock cylinders, folding seat
hardware, and rear compartment
hinges lubrication. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6. More
frequent lubrication may be
required when the vehicle is
exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
Reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑10.
Worn or damaged wiper blade
replacement. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 10‑27.
.
Tire inflation pressures check.
See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑44.
Every Engine Oil Change
.
Change engine oil and filter.
Reset oil life system. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑8 and
Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑10. An Emission
Control Service.
.
.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑51.
Rotate tires if necessary. See
Tire Rotation on page 10‑51.
.
Engine coolant level check. See
Fluids visual leak check (or
every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). A leak in any
system must be repaired and
the fluid level checked.
Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.
.
Engine cooling system
inspection. Visual inspection of
hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.
.
Restraint system component
check. See Safety System
Check on page 3‑24.
.
.
.
Engine air cleaner filter
inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑13.
.
.
Fuel system inspection for
damage or leaks.
.
.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑22.
Exhaust system and nearby heat
shields inspection for loose or
damaged components.
Brake system inspection
(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).
Windshield wiper blade
inspection for wear, cracking,
or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning,
if contaminated. See Exterior
Care on page 10‑76.
Steering and suspension
inspection. Visual inspection for
damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-4
Service and Maintenance
Once a Year
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles
Additional Required Services
Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles
.
See Starter Switch Check on
.
page 10‑26.
Passenger compartment air filter
.
Rotate tires. Tires should be
replacement (or every
.
See Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control Function
Check on page 10‑26.
rotated every 12 000 km/
7,500 miles. See Tire Rotation
on page 10‑51.
24 months, whichever occurs
first). More frequent replacement
may be needed if you drive in
areas with heavy traffic, areas
with poor air quality, or areas
with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be
needed if you notice reduced air
flow, windows fogging up,
or odors. Your dealer can help
you determine when it is the
right time to replace the filter.
.
.
See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 10‑27.
At Each Fuel Stop
.
Engine oil level check. See
See Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check on
page 10‑27.
Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
.
Engine coolant level check. See
Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.
.
.
Accelerator pedal check for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑22.
Throttle system inspection for
interference, binding or for
damaged or missing parts.
Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that
have high effort or excessive
wear. Do not lubricate
Once a Month
.
Tire inflation pressures check.
See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑44.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑51.
accelerator or cruise control
cables.
.
Sunroof track and seal
inspection, if equipped.
See Sunroof on page 2‑19.
.
Underbody flushing service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-5
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles
perform this maintenance item
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of the
vehicle's useful life. We,
.
.
Engine air cleaner filter
Engine cooling system drain,
replacement. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑13.
flush, and refill (or every five
years, whichever occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on
page 10‑16. An Emission
Control Service.
however, urge that all
.
Automatic transmission fluid and
recommended maintenance
services be performed at the
indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
filter change (severe service) for
vehicles mainly driven in heavy
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly
or mountainous terrain, when
frequently towing a trailer,
or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service.
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 10‑11.
.
Engine drive belts inspection for
fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage (or every
10 years, whichever occurs
first). Replace, if needed.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.
Automatic transmission fluid and
filter change (normal service).
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 10‑11.
.
Evaporative control system
.
inspection. Check all fuel and
vapor lines and hoses for proper
hook‐up, routing, and condition.
Check that the purge valve,
if the vehicle has one, works
properly. Replace as needed. An
Emission Control Service. The
U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency or the California Air
Resources Board has
Spark plug replacement and
spark plug wires inspection. See
Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.
An Emission Control Service.
determined that the failure to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-6
Service and Maintenance
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos™ specification. Oils
meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos™ certification
mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos™
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑8.
Engine Oil
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.
Engine Coolant
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, in
Canada 89021320).
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Brake System
Windshield Washer
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®‐VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Power Steering System
Automatic Transmission
Key Lock Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-7
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor,
and Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood and Door Hinges
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-8
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
10350737
A2962C
3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
19210285
15284938
PF61
CF132
3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines
Wiper Blades
12591131
41‐100
Driver Side ‐ 55.0 cm (21.7 in)
Passenger Side ‐ 55.0 cm (21.7 in)
15941731
15941732
—
—
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-9
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-10
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-11
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-12
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
12-1
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
Technical Data
The eighth character in the VIN is
the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle's engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, in the trunk, has the
following information:
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.
Model designation
.
Paint information
.
Production options and special
equipment
Do not remove this label from
the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-2
Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Automatic Transmission (Bottom Pan Removal)
Cooling System Including Reservoir
3.5L and 3.9L V6 FlexFuel Engines
Engine Oil with Filter
7.0 L
7.4 qt
9.6 L
10.1 qt
3.5L and 3.9L V6 FlexFuel Engines
Fuel Tank
3.8 L
66.2 L
4.0 qt
17.5 gal
100 lb ft
Wheel Nut Torque
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine
3.5L FlexFuel V6
VIN Code
Transmission
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
K
3.9L FlexFuel V6
M
Automatic
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.5L V6 and 3.9L V6 Engines
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-4
Technical Data
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-1
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Customer Information
Customer
Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer's sales or
service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Assistance
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-5
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-5
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Courtesy Transportation
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-16
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-17
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general
manager.
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-11
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-2
Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., call the
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In
Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English),
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
When contacting Chevrolet,
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest
following Step One first.
case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any
other venue for relief available
to you.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:
Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied
with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied
after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you
can file with the Better Business
Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program
to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them at
the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give your
inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to
give the Customer Assistance
representative:
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out of court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may
be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
.
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). This is available from the
vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage, and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and
present mileage.
program is free of charge and your
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-3
STEP THREE — Canadian
the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
the General Motors Customer
Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French),
or write to:
Owners: In the event that you do
not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its
participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
Your inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-4
Customer Information
Canada
Mexico, Central America, and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands)
Customer Assistance
Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers
to call the toll-free number for
assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
the letter should be addressed to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gm.ca
General Motors de Mexico, S. de
R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
Col. Granada
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
United States
C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center
01-800-466-0800
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
Overseas
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit.
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
Telephone Devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-243-8872
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-5
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in
the U.S. can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Online Owner Center
.
.
Recall notices for your specific
vehicle
Chevrolet Owner
Center (U.S.) —
www.chevyownercenter.com
OnStar and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries
Information and services
customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient
place.
Other Helpful Links
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise —
www.chevymall.com
.
Digital owner manual, warranty
information, and more
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do
.
Store online service and
maintenance records
.
FAQ
.
Chevrolet dealer locator for
.
Contact Us
service nationwide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-6
Customer Information
.
My Driveway: Access quick links
to parts and service estimates,
check trade-in values,
My GM Canada (Canada) —
www.gm.ca
GM Mobility
Reimbursement Program
My GM Canada is a
or schedule a service
password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save
information on GM vehicles, get
personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your
driveway profile.
.
My Preferences: Manage your
profile and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
Here are a few of the valuable tools
and services you will have
access to:
This program is available to
qualified applicants for cost
reimbursement of eligible
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca
section within www.gm.ca.
.
My Showroom: Find and save
aftermarket adaptive equipment
required for your vehicle, such as
hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift for the vehicle.
information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.
.
My Dealers: Save details such
as address and phone number
for each of your preferred GM
dealers.
For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
Telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-7
.
.
Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or
the same type of claim is made
many times.
Roadside Assistance
Program
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call
1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).
Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle
.
Description of the problem
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,
call 1-800-268-6800.
Coverage
Services Provided
Services are provided up to 5 years/
160 000 km (100,000 miles),
whichever comes first.
.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
Calling for Assistance
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is
not covered.
When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information
ready:
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service to
unlock the vehicle if you are
locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar.
For security reasons, the driver
must present identification
.
Your name, home address, and
home telephone number
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
.
Telephone number of your
before this service is given.
location
.
Emergency Tow From a Public
.
Location of the vehicle
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-8
Customer Information
.
Flat Tire Change: Service to
change a flat tire with the spare
tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's
responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
General Motors of
Services Specific to
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a copy
of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received,
the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help to make arrangements
and explain how to receive
payment.
.
Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
.
Battery Jump Start: Service to
jump start a dead battery.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.
.
Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may give
permission to get local
emergency road service.
You will receive payment, up to
$100, after sending the original
receipt to Roadside Assistance.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
Services Not Included in
Roadside Assistance
.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed
maps of North America are
provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
most scenic route. There is a
limit of six requests per year.
Additional travel information is
also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
.
Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
.
Legal fines.
.
Mounting, dismounting,
or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
.
Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
250 kilometers from where your
trip was started to qualify.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
Transportation Options
13-9
Scheduling Service
Appointments
When your vehicle requires
warranty service, contact your
dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service
appointment and advising your
service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer
can help minimize your
Courtesy Transportation
Program
Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by
providing several transportation
options. Depending on the
To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the
Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada),
extended powertrain, and/or
circumstances, your dealer can
offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
inconvenience.
hybrid‐specific warranties in both
the U.S. and Canada.
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
Several Courtesy Transportation
options are available to assist in
reducing your inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
Transportation. Dealers may provide
shuttle service to get you to your
destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes
one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service
within reasonable time and distance
parameters of the dealer's area.
immediately, keep driving it until it
can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety related. If it is, please call
your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
If the dealer requests you to bring
the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the
same day repair.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-10
Customer Information
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program
Information
Your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is
kept for an overnight warranty
repair. Rental reimbursement will be
limited and must be supported by
original receipts. This requires that
you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state/
provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage,
or rental usage beyond the
If your vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact your
dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be
administered by appropriate dealer
personnel.
transportation is used instead of the
dealer's shuttle service, the expense
must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the
maximum amount allowed by
GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should
you arrange transportation through
a friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable fuel
expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original
General Motors reserves the right to
unilaterally modify, change,
or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to
resolve all questions of claim
eligibility pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
receipts. See your dealer for
information regarding the allowance
amounts for reimbursement of fuel
or other transportation costs.
completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-11
Recycled original equipment parts
may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part may be an acceptable choice to
maintain your vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance; however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
may not perform properly in
Collision Damage Repair
subsequent collisions. Aftermarket
parts are not covered by your GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any vehicle failure related to such
parts is not covered by that
warranty.
If your vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have the
damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish your vehicle's
resale value, and safety
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you
choose a collision repair facility that
meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. Your dealer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained
performance can be compromised
in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM
Aftermarket collision parts are also
available. These are made by
companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your
vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature
technicians and comparable
equipment.
Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle's
designed appearance, durability,
and safety are preserved. The use
of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
durability/corrosion problems, and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-12
Customer Information
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that ensures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read your lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
Gather the following information:
Insuring Your Vehicle
.
Driver's name, address, and
Protect your investment in your
GM vehicle with comprehensive and
collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the
quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs by using
telephone number
.
Driver's license number
.
Owner's name, address, and
telephone number
.
Vehicle license plate number
.
Vehicle make, model, and
If a Crash Occurs
model year
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a
.
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you ensure that
your vehicle will be repaired with
GM original equipment collision
parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
.
Insurance company and policy
number
.
General description of the
damage to the other vehicle
police officer.
Choose a reputable repair facility
that uses quality replacement parts.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in
this section.
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
For emergency towing see
Roadside Assistance Program on
page 13‑7.
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? on page 3‑32.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-13
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist
on Genuine GM parts. Remember,
if your vehicle is leased, you may be
obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
Service Publications
Ordering Information
In the event that your vehicle
requires damage repairs,
Service Manuals
GM recommends that you take an
active role in its repair. If you have a
pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there,
or have it towed there. Specify to
the facility that any required
replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered by
your GM vehicle warranty.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on the
engines, transmission, axle,
suspension, brakes, electrical,
steering, body, etc.
If another party's insurance
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
initially value the repair using
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-14
Customer Information
Owner Information
Current and Past Models
Reporting Safety
Defects
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle.
The Owner Manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for
all models.
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles.
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.
Or you can write to:
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees
Note to Canadian Customers: All
listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Canadian residents are to
make checks payable in U.S. funds.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-15
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, notify Transport
Canada immediately, and notify
General Motors of Canada Limited.
Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA
(or Transport Canada) in a situation
like this, notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
You can also obtain
Transport Canada
other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-16
Customer Information
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven.
For example, your vehicle uses
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control the
vehicle. These modules may store
data to help your dealer technician
service your vehicle. Some modules
may also store data about how you
operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed.
These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions,
and temperature settings.
This vehicle has an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a
vehicle's systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
Important: EDR data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash
investigation.
.
How various systems in your
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
vehicle were operating
.
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened
.
How far, if at all, the driver was
pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was
traveling
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-17
GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request by police or
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
personal information or link with any
other GM system containing
personal information.
pressing the Q button and
speaking to an advisor.
Radio Frequency
Statement
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS‐210/220/310.
Navigation System
If the vehicle has a navigation
system, use of the system may
result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and
other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
required by law. Data that GM
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
1. The device may not cause
interference.
OnStar®
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences such
as key fobs for remote door locking/
unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
If your vehicle is equipped with an
active OnStar system, that system
may also record data in crash or
near crash‐like situations. The
OnStar Terms and Conditions
provides information on data
collection and use and is available
in the OnStar glove box kit, at
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-18
Customer Information
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-1
Airbag System (cont.)
What Will You See After
Appearance Care
A
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Assistance Program,
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Audio System
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-1
Automatic
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-25
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Automatic Transmission
Accessories and
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-32
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-28
Airbags
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-39
Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-13
Air Filter, Passenger
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
What Makes an Airbag
Adding Equipment to the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-16
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Alarm System
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Antenna
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Anti-Theft
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-34
Antilock Brake
Shift Lock Control
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-2
INDEX
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Headlamps, Front Turn
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-16
Check
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Ignition
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-27
Child Restraints
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Voltage and Charging
Signal, Sidemarker, and
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-33
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-32
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-27
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
Lower Anchors and
C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
California
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-50
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Securing . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-57, 3-58
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Cautions, Danger, and
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-3
Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-11
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Engine Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Customer Assistance (cont.)
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Customer Assistance
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Customer Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-13
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Door
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Driving
Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Driving for Better Fuel
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-11
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-16
Daytime Running Lamps/
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-4
INDEX
Engine (cont.)
Coolant Temperature
E
F
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Electrical Equipment,
Filter
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Cooling System Messages . . .5-30
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Overheated Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-24
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-16
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . .10-11
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Front Fog Lamps
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Front Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Electrical System
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 9-31
Electronic Stability Control
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Check and Service Engine
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-36
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-36
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Requirements, California . . . . .9-36
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Fuses
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Instrument Panel Fuse
G
H
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Gasoline
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Headlamps
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Gauges
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Daytime Running Lamps/
Engine Coolant
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Warning Lights and
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal, Sidemarker, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
General Information
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-24
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-6
INDEX
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
How to Wear Safety Belts
Latch, Lower Anchors and
K
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Lighting
Delayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-22
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-14
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-32
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
I
L
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Ignition Transmission Lock
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-39
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Lamps
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Infants and Young Children,
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-17
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
LATCH System
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Replacing Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-7
Lights (cont.)
Messages (cont.)
M
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Lower Anchors and Tethers
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Mirrors
Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-17
Messages
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-34
Battery Voltage and
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-30
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Automatic Dimming
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Monitor System, Tire
for Children (LATCH
SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-8
INDEX
Outlets
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-18
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Privacy
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-17
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-9
Proposition 65 Warning,
N
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Navigation System
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
P
O
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Parking
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-27
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-23
Passenger Airbag Status
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-41
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Operation, Infotainment
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-34
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-9
Remote Keyless Entry
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3
Running the Vehicle While
R
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-40
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Restraints
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-17
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Recreational Vehicle
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
S
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-25
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-23
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . .9-31
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-10
INDEX
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-9
Seats
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Securing Child
Service (cont.)
Maintenance, General
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Storage
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Publications Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-9
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-38
Shift Lock Control Function
Check, Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Shifting
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Sidemarker
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Spare Tire
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Specifications and
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Storage Areas
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-57, 3-58
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Service
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-11
Tires (cont.)
Traction
T
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-46
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-57
When It Is Time for New
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-29
Control System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Turn and Lane-Change
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Taillamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-5
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-13
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Tires
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-47
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Towing
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Turn Signal
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-41
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-74
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-12
INDEX
Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
U
Uniform Tire Quality
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-48
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Windshield
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-42
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
V
Vehicle
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-27
W
Warning Lights, Gauges,
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Belkin Film Camera F1D084vea2 User Manual
Black Box Portable Generator BLACK BOX Pattern GeneratorVGA User Manual
Blue Rhino Charcoal Grill NPC2604 User Manual
Blue Rhino Gas Grill GBC831WB User Manual
BOXLIGHT Projector MP 86i User Manual
Briggs Stratton Plumbing Product 117400 User Manual
Brinkmann Gas Grill Series 4435 User Manual
Cabletron Systems Switch ELS100 24TX User Manual
Campbell Hausfeld Paint Sprayer HDS590 User Manual
Casio Musical Instrument LK100 User Manual